JP2022186835A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can enhance amusement of a game by using music that is output during at least a period in which the game is played.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: output means for outputting music during at least a period in which a player plays a game; and display control means for controlling display of a new image on display means, stopping an image or deletion of an image according to timing of beat of music output from the output means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, display means such as liquid crystal display devices display various effects images such as variable effects (dynamic display of identification information) to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent document 1). Background music (BGM) is output from the gaming machine while such an effect is being performed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-046635

By the way, it is desired to use this BGM to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a game by using music that is output at least while the game is being played. purpose.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is established; and start of dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. and a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result by the judgment means triggered by the instruction by the instructing means, dynamic display executing means If predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by output means for outputting predetermined music under conditions different from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information instructed by the instruction means; and dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means display control means for controlling dynamic display of the identification information one or more times in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output by the output means before display, and a pseudo stop display of the identification information; and sounding means for generating a sound indicating that the pseudo stop display has occurred in the dynamic display of (1) in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output from the output means.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, determination means for making a determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; instruction means for instructing start of dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition; dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result of the judgment means triggered by the instruction by the instruction means, wherein the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means; When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of (1), a predetermined game value is given to the player, and at least during the period when the player is playing a game, the instruction means output means for outputting predetermined music under conditions different from the instructed start of the dynamic display of the identification information; and the output means from before the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. display control means for controlling the dynamic display of the identification information to be displayed in a pseudo-stop manner one or more times in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output by the display control means; and sounding means for generating a sound indicating that there has been a stop display in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output from the output means.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a jackpot variation pattern table. (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (e) is a schematic representation of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table It is a schematic diagram shown. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM within the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timings of the first role product. As an example of the variation effect, it is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is pseudo-run. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a part of sound editing/output processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a part of sound editing/output processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the timing of producing ball-entering sounds when balls enter the first ball-entering hole one by one during one beat of the BGM. (a) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the ball entry sound when three balls enter the first ball entrance during one beat of the BGM; The sound when two balls enter the first ball entrance during a beat, and another ball enters the first ball entrance before the next back beat. (c) shows that one ball enters the first ball entrance during one beat of the BGM, and further until the next back beat. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the timing of producing a ball-entering sound when two balls enter the first ball-entering hole; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a pending ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a confirmation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. and (c) is a flowchart showing a demonstration command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 10 is a flow chart showing variable display processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a part of sound editing/output processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table; 4 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; It is the flowchart which showed the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing display command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a part of sound editing/output processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a part of sound editing/output processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a part of display setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a part of a starting winning sound output process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed a part of starting prize-winning sound output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made uniform. Various productions such as variable production and reach production are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "town stage" with a downtown motif, a "sea stage" with a sea motif, a "mountain stage" with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable performance is not performed or during high-speed variation.

In addition, when the normal ready-to-win production is started in the third pattern display device 81, when developing from normal ready-to-win to super ready-to-win, the selection screen of the production mode of super ready-to-win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during normal ready-to-win. is configured as When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. For example, the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information.

The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 .

The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance (starting opening) 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . A plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a variable is in progress accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) by a lighting state, or perform a variable display after the variable is completed. , the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by the lighting state, and the ball (holding ball) that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of held balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not it is a big win is determined, and when it is determined as a big win, the type of the big win is also determined. . As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a time-saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicates a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a time saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In the high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a second symbol (normal symbol), which will be described later, is increased, and the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. It includes a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 by becoming easier.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to the time when the probability is not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" means that the jackpot probability is normal, and only the second pattern (normal pattern) hit probability is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. It refers to a game state in which the electric accessory associated with the first ball entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 .

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 or the number of times of winning in the second symbol may change the number of times the electric accessary is opened. For example, the time saving state of the low probability state and the high probability state may be states in which the opening time of the electric accessary associated with the first ball entrance 64 is longer than other gaming states. In addition, the time-saving state and high-probability state of the low-probability state may be states in which the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit in the second symbol is greater than in other game states.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) as a trigger. (hereinafter abbreviated as "display device"), and an LED that variably displays the second pattern (normal pattern) triggered by the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67. A second pattern display device 83 is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory 87 that is a movable accessory for the advance notice effect.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 6 and 12), which will be described later. and three symbol columns to the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. It is a decorative display according to the Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, is a big win, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is constructed so that a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high probability state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols ("high probability symbol", "variable probability symbol") to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (“low probability symbol”, “normal symbol”) to which even numbers are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed, such as by putting it out.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one variable display is performed as one aspect of the variable performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is configured so that a so-called "pseudo run", in which the pseudo variation of the third symbol is continuously carried out a plurality of times, can be carried out. "Pseudo-run" is a type of advance notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win as a result of the variable display in which the pseudo-run is executed. A variation effect is performed by a mode in which pseudo variation) is repeatedly performed.

In the "pseudo run", the greater the number of repetitions of the pseudo-stop and re-variation (that is, the number of times the pseudo-variation is continuously performed) during the one variation display, the greater the jackpot is given after the variation display. The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase expectations. As a result, the player can feel that the more the pseudo-variation is repeated during one variation display, the higher the possibility of winning a big win. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game by performing the variable performance by the "pseudo-continuation".

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37, and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12, etc. are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls is determined according to the number of holding lamps in the lit state. may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The first accessory 87 is a disc-shaped movable accessory when viewed from the front of the game area, and is used for an advance notice effect. The first accessory 87 is normally located at the original position as the initial position, is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86, and is invisible to the player. Then, when the advance notice effect by the first role product 87 is performed, the first role product 87 operates as follows.

That is, the first accessory 87 descends from the center frame 86 at an arbitrary timing of the variation performance of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, and moves up and down when it reaches a certain position. When the variable effect becomes a big hit, after the first accessory 87 moves up and down, it descends to the maximum descending position (maximum point position) and rotates clockwise in the front view of the game area (arrow A direction in FIG. 2). By operating, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notice effect) for notifying that a big hit will be achieved in the variable effect is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable effect is lost, the first accessory 87 does not descend to the maximum point position after moving up and down, but rises and is housed inside the upper side of the center frame 86 again. As a result, while the first accessory 87 is moving up and down, the first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position and the player can expect a big win, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be done. Also, when the first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position, it is possible to give the player great joy and a sense of superiority in winning a big win.

An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first role object 87, and by lighting or blinking the LED together with the rotation of the first role object 87, the advance notice effect is further enhanced. emphasized. In addition, according to the action of the first role object 87, an image around the first role object 87 with increased brightness is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As a result, the advance notice effect by the first accessory 87 is further emphasized, and the player's pleasure can be further enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a). The first accessory 87 adopts a rack-and-opinion system as a configuration for moving the first accessory 87 up and down. 87c and a slide gear 87d. Although not shown, a first accessory rotating motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. When the first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates clockwise in the game area when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and by applying a pulse signal, drives and rotates the drive gear 87b in given step units. The driven gear 87c meshes with the drive gear 87b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 87b.

The first slide gear 87d is a flat plate-shaped rod with teeth cut, and is meshed with the driven gear 87c so that it can reciprocate vertically as the driven gear 87c rotates. . A first accessory 87 is connected to the lower end of the first slide gear 87d.

Therefore, the drive gear 87a is driven to rotate step by step by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, and the slide gear 87d moves in the vertical direction step by step via the driven gear 87c. Along with this, the first accessory 87 can be moved up and down within the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, when the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 descends, the first accessory 87 is configured to reach the maximum point position.

The drive control of the first role object vertical movement motor 87a and the first role object rotation motor 87e is a voice lamp described later that controls the output of sound, lighting and extinguishing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. It is performed by the controller 112 .

A protrusion 87f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 87d. An origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. Further, a maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. As shown in FIG. Note that the maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 88, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light-emitting element mounting portion 88a to which a light-emitting element (not shown) is mounted, a light-receiving element mounting portion 88b to which a light-receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and one end of the light-emitting element mounting portion 88a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of one end of a light receiving element mounting portion 88b and a connecting portion 88c that connects the light emitting element and the light receiving element so that they are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A detection groove 88d is formed by the portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c.

When there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 88b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light-emitting element attached to the light-emitting element mounting portion 88a is blocked, and the light is received by the light-receiving element attached to the light-receiving element mounting portion 95b. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element, and an on signal when the light is not received. It can be determined whether or not it has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is arranged on the front side when viewed from the front, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 88c is arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. The projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inserted into the detection groove 88d so that light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light-emitting element to the light-receiving element is blocked, the control device can play a first role by outputting an ON signal from the origin detection sensor 88. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

Also, the maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. It is attached so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, by outputting an ON signal from the maximum point detection sensor 89, the control device It can be determined that 1 role object 87 has reached the maximum point position.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 provides a variable display that alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. is configured to The number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of held balls passing through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance (start winning opening) 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 draws a lottery for a big win, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the variable display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol display. It is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the device 81. FIG. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 becomes a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win stops after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. A stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a winning variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. In addition, the RAM 203 controls main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (large winning lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

Various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbols are used. , a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), or at 4 millisecond intervals in the main processing (see FIG. 22). Furthermore, some counters are irregularly updated during the main process (see FIG. 22). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated values of each counter. Update the counter.

The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In the reserved area, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for temporarily storing (holding) In addition, the execution area stores a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the variation pattern and stop type of the jackpot lottery and variable performance at the start timing of the variation. It is an area for

When the MPU 201 detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time are counted. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no reservation in the reservation area and all of the first to fourth reservation areas are vacant areas, the value of each counter is stored in the first reservation area. When there is only one reservation in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first reservation area, the value of each counter is stored in the second reservation area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and each counter value is stored only in the first and second reservation areas, the value of each counter is stored in the third reservation area. If the number of reservations in the reservation area is three and each counter value is stored only in the first to third reservation areas, the value of each counter is stored in the fourth reservation area.

Thereby, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the start winning. can be done. In addition, when the start winning is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the first to fourth reserve areas, the value of each counter at that time is discarded without being reserved. That is, in this embodiment, the value of each counter can be reserved up to four starting prizes.

In addition, when it comes to the start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reservation area to the execution area, Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, determination of the big hit lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the type of the stop symbol is performed.

Also, after the values of the counters in the first reservation area are moved to the execution area, the values of the counters stored in the second reservation area are shifted to the empty first reservation area and stored in the third reservation area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved second area is shifted to the empty reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the empty reserved third area. Thereby, when the variable performance is started based on the value of each counter reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203c, the reserved number is reduced by one and one area of the reserved area is released.

Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first winning random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a big winning lottery, and is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt process in this embodiment). The first random number counter C1 is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 899) and reaching the maximum value (eg, 899 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). This is done by resetting back to 0. Also, when the first hit random number counter C1 completes one round (when it returns to the initial value at the next update as a result of periodic updating from a certain initial value), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set to the first winning random number counter C1 as a new initial value, and the update is performed from the initial value.

As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first winning random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also composed of a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated not only once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, but also repeatedly during the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Then, at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big winning random value, also called a winning value) for a big winning, and a big winning. hold a lottery. The value of the random number that will be the jackpot (random number value for the jackpot) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. ) is determined as a jackpot when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in ) matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value (jackpot random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as a jackpot. This jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number value referenced when the game state is in a low probability state (that is, a period when the probability is not changing) and a jackpot random value that is referenced when the game state is in a high probability state (that is, during a probability change). It is divided into and configured, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-899. In addition, the number of jackpot random numbers that become a jackpot in the low-probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is associated with the "low-probability state" and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that become a jackpot in a high probability state is 30, and the values are "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are associated with the "high probability state" and are included in the jackpot random number table 202a stored.

The MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the game state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a when judging a jackpot. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c) used for judging the jackpot is the jackpot random number read from the jackpot random number table 203a. , and if they match, it is determined as a big hit.

That is, when the gaming state is a low-probability state, a big win is achieved when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first winning random number counter C1 is updated within the range of 0 to 899, the probability of a big winning in the low probability state is 1/300. Also, when the game state is a high probability state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" will be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is 1/30.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not overlap each other. The jackpot random number is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the value will be input from the outside and that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 together with the first hit random number counter C1.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203c is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a random number for a big hit, the variation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation performance will be those at the time of the big win. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202.

Here, with reference to FIG.8(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.8(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and 100 There is a "15R normal jackpot" that is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds hits two rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value of the first per type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value of the first per type counter C2 "40 to 39" is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79” is associated, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 “80 to 99” is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") when it is out. That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of misalignment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As the stop type selected in this embodiment, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is shifted to the front or back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and "front and rear out reach", and after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is stopped. There are three stop (effect) patterns: "Reach other than front and rear out" in which the is stopped outside the reach pattern, and "Complete out" in which the reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203c is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the stop type in the variable effect is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at the time of deviation is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area.

In this embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for selecting the stop type corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. "Completely out" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is 98, 99, and "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is 90 to 97. Outer reach” and “Reach other than front and back out” are less likely to be selected.

In addition, if the probability is low, a table with a narrow random number range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. This makes it difficult for “completely out” to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining the fluctuation pattern, for example, it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it is configured to return to 0. there is The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every 4 milliseconds during the main processing (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing.

The MPU 201 refers to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the counter buffer 203b and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 at the start of variation, and determines the variation pattern to be executed in the variation effect. The variation pattern determined here is the variation time of the pattern variation.

That is, the main controller 110 determines only the variation time of the pattern variation as the variation pattern. A specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . Based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select the third pattern display device from among the variation modes that can be displayed in variation during the variation time. At 81, the details of the variation mode of the third pattern to be displayed are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to variably display the third pattern, and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. At the same time, the lamps of the lamp display device 227 (electrical parts 29 to 33) are turned on and blinked.

In this way, the main controller 110 determines only the variation time as the processing for determining the variation pattern, and details of the variation mode according to the variation time are provided by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. , determination processing of the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be easily performed as compared with the case where the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110 .

Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. There is a risk that it will have to be composed of more than one byte, which may complicate the sending and receiving of commands.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variable time, only the information about the determined variable time needs to be notified to the sound ramp controller 113 and the like. Often, it is possible to simplify the configuration of commands related to the notification. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transmission and reception of commands from becoming complicated. Further, even if only the variation time of the pattern variation is determined by the main controller 110, the variation mode corresponding to the specified variation time is determined from among many variation modes by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Then, since the third pattern display device 81 is configured to perform the variable display in the determined variable mode, various variable performances can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be improved. be able to.

Now, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern table 202c for the big hit used at the time of the big hit and the variation pattern table 202c used at the time of loss A deviation pattern table 202d is prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d for deviation, depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time of the time saving state or the probability variation, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state, the variation pattern for the deviation (probability variation) A table 202d2 and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

Here, details of various variation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8(c), the big-hit variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups based on the big-hit type. Specifically, it is divided into a common 15R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 15R variable variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, and a dedicated 2R variable variable jackpot that is referred to when it is a 2R variable variable jackpot. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each divided group.

At the start of fluctuation, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a jackpot random number value, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area Accordingly, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the big win variation table 202c.

In common with the 15R jackpot, there are variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds as variation patterns. The correspondence between these fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for fluctuation A, 11 to 99 for fluctuation B, and 100 to 198 for fluctuation C.

When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 performs a variation effect in a normal reach mode. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, a variation effect is performed in the form of super reach or a variation effect by pseudo-continuation is performed. will be In addition, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 performs a variation effect in the form of special reach, or a variation effect by pseudo-continuation is done.

No reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and after the short reach, the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned (so-called, the patterns are aligned at the end of Vita). It is a variation pattern. Super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (eg, reach developed from long reach or normal reach). In addition, special reach has the first pattern (or third pattern) after reach with a longer fluctuation time than super reach (for example, special reach that develops further after super reach and development destination from normal reach is different from super reach) reach, etc.) is a variation pattern.

Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R variable variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, various types of special reach are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that normal reach and super reach can also be selected, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which a big win can be expected from any reach.

It should be noted that normal reach, super reach and special reach executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are prepared in a large number with different effect contents even if the fluctuation time is the same. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, the reach in which a predetermined character is displayed is prepared when two symbols on the effective line L1 become the same pattern and the reach state occurs or at other timings. ing. Also, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, multiple reach with different effects are prepared, such as the reach that displays the rear image that changes quickly, the reach that adds a notice effect before the change starts, and the reach that adds a big hit effect when it changes again. ing. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of variable performances, and to increase the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-continuation can be executed by the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pseudo-continuation further heightens the interest of the player.

The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variable jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the 2R variation (59 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, one mode is selected from among the plurality of variation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot. , the variable effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first pattern (or third pattern) stops at a specific pattern along with the "chicken" character, and a "girl" that does not normally appear Along with the character, the final first pattern (or the third pattern) includes a variation mode in which it stops at a specific pattern.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, another variation type counter may be provided for fine-tuning the variation time by about ±several seconds, and whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or a ready-to-win effect before the start of the change or during the change effect or may be determined by another variation type counter.

FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8(d), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is dedicated to complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and front-rear deviation reach and forward-rear deviation. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of loss, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. is attached.

At the start of the fluctuation, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value for a big hit (random value for a big hit), that is, if it is a value that will be an outlier, the game state excludes the time-saving state. In the normal low probability state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is selected according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. , is determined from the outlier (normal) variation pattern.

For complete outliers, the variation pattern is a variation D that ends in a short time of 7 seconds and does not reach, and a variation E that lasts longer than variation D but does not reach 10 seconds. The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a variation F in which pseudo-variation by pseudo-continuation is performed five times in one variation, and the reach is completely lost without finally establishing a reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are 0 to 98 for variation D (7 seconds), 99 to 148 for variation E (10 seconds), and 149 to 198 for variation F (55 seconds). In addition, common reach variations include the above-described variation A (30 seconds), variation B (60 seconds), and variation C (90 seconds) as variation patterns. (30 seconds) is 0-98, variation B (60 seconds) is 99-190, and variation C (90 seconds) is 191-198.

FIG. 8(e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8(e), the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation in the same manner as the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. and a common reach that is referred to when the front-rear deviating reach and the reach other than the front-rear deviating reach are determined as the stop type at the time of deviation.

Then, for each divided group, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. It should be noted that the variation pattern selected when referring to the completely outlier only does not include the variation F (55 seconds), and only the variation D (7 seconds) and the variation E (10 seconds) are selected. In addition, the variation pattern selected when the common reach is referred to includes variation A (30 seconds), variation B (60 seconds) and variation C (90 seconds), similar to the outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. ).

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not result in a big win, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the probability variation, execution is performed. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. be done.

In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 for complete deviation is 0 to 190 for variation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for variation E (10 seconds). It's becoming In addition, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in common reach is 0 to 98 for variation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for various types of outlier special reach.

The (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, so the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. Become. Therefore, when you are in a short time state or a high probability state, if a variation F with a variation time of 55 seconds is performed even though it is completely off, or a variation E with a relatively long variation time is performed frequently, the following It takes time to start the variable display, and the player is put in a waiting state, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is not preferable for the hall because the operating rate is lowered. Therefore, in the case of complete deviation, when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the game state is different than when it is in the normal state except for the time saving state. By structuring so that variation D with a shorter variation time than E is more likely to be selected, and by starting the next variation display early, the possibility of giving discomfort to the player can be reduced. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting whether or not to display an advance notice, etc.). In addition, when the reach is established at the time of deviation, another variation type counter determines how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted back and forth, etc.) may be determined by

In addition, the selection of the type of loss is configured to be divided into the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. (For example, in the case of 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the variation display may be terminated early, so the selection may be made by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2, It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal or probability variation corresponding to the number of held balls.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8(d) and 8(e), the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply outliers, and when that deviation is selected, refer to other tables , variation D and variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of held balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7 again, various counters will be described. The second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, as described above. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to zero. Also, when the second hit random number counter C4 completes one cycle (when it returns to the initial value at the next update as a result of periodic updating from a certain initial value), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. obtained when

There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the winning is made, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol). is displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 22).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The RAM 203 has a counter buffer 203b and a reserved ball storage area 203c for storing various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, and I/O values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The suspended ball number counter 203a suspends the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times. The initial value of the held ball counter 203a is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S1403 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the ball is entered into the first ball inlet 64 and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

The sound lamp control device 113 changes the value of the number of held balls of variable display held by the main controller 110 by the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 each time the number of held balls counter 203a is incremented by 1. can be obtained. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even in the event that the number of balls has been lost, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs the first role. 87, setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

The audio ramp control device 113 includes an MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire audio ramp control device 113, and a sound output LSI 301 that generates a sound to be reproduced and drives an audio output device 226 to output the generated sound. have. The MPU 221 has a program ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

Details of the RAM 223 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a reserved ball number counter 223a, a detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, a time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, a start prize counter 223d, a frame button operation effect flag 223e, a frame button operation frequency counter 223f, a pointer 223g, a timer counter 223h, and an elapsed time. It has at least a sound generation flag 223j and a pitch information memory 223k.

The reserved ball number counter 223a, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the control device 110 .

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and manages the number of pending balls by the pending ball number counter 223a.

Specifically, the sound ramp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls of the variable effect by entering the first ball entrance 64, and when the value of the pending ball number counter 203a in the main controller 110 is added. When the command for the number of held balls sent from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the number of held balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the command for the number of held balls (that is, the value held by the main controller 110 The number of pending balls of the variable effect that has been performed) is stored in the pending ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 25).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and upon receipt thereof, the third symbol When the mode of variable display on the display device 81 is set, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2107 in FIG. 26). In this way, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command sent from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. .

The value of the number of reserved balls counter 223a is used to display the number of reserved balls symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, and in response to reception of the variation pattern command, stores the reserved ball number counter 223a. is updated, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the reserved ball counter 223a.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the pending ball number pattern. Drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 (see S2951 in FIG. 41). As described above, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the pending counter 403a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending counter 403a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is a counter for determining the variation mode (detailed variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started based on the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the program ROM 222 It is used together with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a (see FIG. 6) provided in the . Here, along with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a will also be described.

In this embodiment, as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time of 30 seconds) is specified by a variation pattern command from main controller 110, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds. In addition to the usual normal reach, there are multiple normal reach that are displayed while a predetermined character is changing.

Detailed patterns determined when variation B (variation time of 60 seconds) is instructed include a predetermined character being displayed during the variation time of 60 seconds, a rear image rapidly changing and being displayed, and the like. In addition to preparing a plurality of super reach, a plurality of pseudo-runs are prepared in which the pseudo-variation is performed multiple times during the variation time of 60 seconds.

A detailed pattern determined when variation C (variation time of 90 seconds) is instructed includes a predetermined character being displayed during the variation time of 90 seconds, a background image being rapidly changed and displayed, and the like. In addition to preparing a plurality of special reach, a plurality of pseudo-runs are prepared in which the pseudo-variation is performed multiple times during the variation time of 90 seconds.

As a detailed variation pattern determined when 2R variation (variation time of 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variable jackpots with variation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

Further, for each variation pattern (variation A to variation F, 2R variation), different detailed variation patterns are prepared depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, time-saving or variable.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed for the variation pattern command from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is composed of a loop counter, and its update is performed periodically (in the present embodiment, in the processing of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 24)). . The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment) and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). In addition, the initial value "0" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when power is turned on.

In the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a, for each fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation) notified from the main controller 110, various detailed details prepared for each fluctuation pattern A value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the variation pattern. In addition, the correspondence between the detailed variation pattern and the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b depends on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 where the variation effect is performed (regular state, probability variable state, or time saving state). Further, each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) is associated separately depending on whether the pattern to be displayed as determined in the variation presentation is "big hit" or "loss".

When the MPU 221 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b at that time is read from the RAM223. Then, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state and it is determined as a jackpot from the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the game state is changed to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. is "normal state" and the stop type is "jackpot", the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. . In addition, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state and it is determined that it is out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the game state is changed to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command is "time saving state" and the stop type is "out", the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. .

Based on the determined detailed variation pattern, the MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also sends the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third pattern display device 81 perform a variation effect according to the determined detailed variation pattern.

In addition, when the variation D (variation time 7 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, the detailed variation pattern of the pachinko machine 10 is completely out after the variation time of 7 seconds has elapsed. One is prepared for each game state. When variation E (variation time of 10 seconds) is instructed, one variation pattern is prepared for each game state of the pachinko machine 10 as details of a mode in which the game is completely lost after the variation time of 10 seconds has elapsed. Further, when variation F (variation time of 55 seconds) is instructed, pseudo-variation by pseudo-continuation is performed five times during the variation time of 55 seconds, and finally the reach is not established and complete failure occurs. One variation pattern is prepared. However, the fluctuation F is instructed only when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, as described above.

Therefore, when either variation D or E is instructed from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 prepares for each according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223a. Based on this, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command. In addition, when the fluctuation F is instructed from the main control unit 110, the MPU 221 determines the detailed fluctuation pattern prepared only regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a, and based on it, the voice It controls the output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and notifies the display control device 114 of the detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command.

Here, in the voice ramp control device 113, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined by the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, front-back off reach, front-back off It is judged based on the number of times of fluctuation.

For example, when a 15R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is indicated as a stop type in a stop type command corresponding to a certain variable performance, the pachinko machine 10 is operated after the jackpot performance after the variable performance until the next big win. It is determined that the game state is a variable probability state. In addition, when a 15R normal jackpot is indicated as a stop type in a stop type command corresponding to a certain variable performance, after the big win performance after the variable performance, the variable performance is performed 100 times, or the next big win. The game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time-saving state until it becomes. After 100 times of variation presentation, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big win.

The time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is background music (hereinafter referred to as "BGM (Back Ground Music)") that is used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving BGM (hereinafter referred to as "time saving BGM"). ) is being reproduced. When the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223d is on, it indicates that the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM, and when it is off, it indicates that BGM other than the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM.

The time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-on process (see FIG. 23). Then, when the reproduction of the BGM for time saving is started under the control of the MPU 221, the BGM reproduction flag for time saving 223c is set to ON (S2148 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the reproduction of the time saving BGM is stopped by the MPU 221, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF (S2149 in FIG. 28).

In this embodiment, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is detected, the player is notified of the ball entering. A ball-entering sound is output from the audio output device 226 . The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the ball-entering sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the time-saving BGM.

Specifically, when the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is turned on, the MPU 221, upon receiving the pending ball number command from the main controller 110, determines that there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Stock up on that information. In addition, the MPU 221 manages the beat timing of the time-saving BGM sounded by the audio output device 226 . Then, at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM or at the timing between the beats (backbeat), the sound output device 226 emits the ball-entering sound corresponding to the stocked ball-entering.

As a result, the ball-entering sound is produced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can rhythmically play the game to the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 continuously, the MPU 221 is stocked not only at the beat timing of the time-saving BGM, but also at the back beat timing (the middle between the beats). A ball-entering sound corresponding to the ball-entering is produced from the voice output device 226 . As a result, it is possible to create a more complicated rhythm with the ball-entering sound, so that the player can be further entertained.

Further, when the MPU 221 generates the ball-entering sound, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the ball-entering sound based on the code (chord) of the time-saving BGM at the timing of producing the ball-entering sound. Specifically, one of the pitches of the constituent sounds that form the chord is selected as the pitch of the ball-entering sound. For example, if the code of the time-saving BGM at the pronunciation timing of the entering sound is "C", one of the constituent sounds "Do", "Mi", and "So" of the code, the pitch of the entering sound Select.

As a result, the ball-entering sound is not only sounded in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also sounded with a pitch matching the code of the time-saving BGM. Therefore, a chord is composed of the ball-entering sound and the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a more pleasant sound. In addition, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64, a melody accompanied by BGM for time saving can be composed of the ball entry sound and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing and number of balls entered. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies that are produced by the ball-entering sound from time to time.

Furthermore, when the MPU 221 continuously pronounces the ball-entering sound corresponding to the ball-entering stocked in the same code in the time-saving BGM, the first-ball-entering sound and the third-ball-entering sound are different. , the pitch is selected from the constituent tones, and for the second ball-entering tone, the transitional tone that connects the first and third constituent tones in a musical scale is selected. For example, if the code of the time-saving BGM when the ball-entering sound is pronounced three times in a row is “C”, the pitch of the first ball-entering sound is set to the constituent sound “do”, and the third ball-entering sound is Let the pitch of the ball sound be the constituent sound "mi", and let the pitch of the second ball-entering sound be the passing sound "re". As a result, the three ball-entering sounds are sequentially pronounced in the order of ``do'', ``re'', and ``mi'' while matching the beat of the BGM of the code ``C'', so the range of the melody played by the ball-entering sounds can be expanded. spread. In other words, while matching the rhythm of the BGM, inserting the ball-entering sound whose pitch is the passing sound between the ball-balling sounds whose pitches are the constituent sounds of the BGM chord, the ball-balling sounds are produced. Thus, variations can be given to the melody of the ball-entering sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody of the ball-entering sound does not become monotonous, and voice output can be performed to keep the player from getting bored.

The start winning counter 223d is a counter for counting the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, the number of starting wins. When the MPU 221 receives the pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, it adds 1 to the starting prize winning counter 223d, and the first ball entrance. 64 is stocked (S2010 in FIG. 25).

Then, when the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is ON and the time saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, if the start prize winning counter 223d has a value of 1 or more at the timing of the beat of the time saving BGM, that is, If the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is stocked, at the timing of that beat, the ball entering sound with the pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the code of the time-saving BGM at that time is pronounced (Fig. 29). As a result, the ball-entering sound representing the ball entering the first ball-entering hole 64 can be produced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, allowing the player to listen to the rhythmical and pleasant sound. can be done.

Also, at the timing of the back beat of the time saving BGM, if the value of the start winning prize counter 223d is 2 or more and the sound of the ball hitting is sounded in the previous beat, the code of the time saving BGM at the back beat timing. On the condition that the time-saving BGM code at the timing of the next beat is the same code, a ball-entering sound with a pitch equal to that of the chord is produced (see FIG. 30). As a result, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64, the ball entry sound is generated using the backbeat timing of the time-saving BGM. can. Also, on the timings of the preceding and following beats, the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the entering sound of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the entering pitch sound. Therefore, as described above, variations can be given to the melody of the sound of the ball hitting.

The starting prize winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 when the winning ball sound is produced (S2167 in FIG. 29, S2179 in FIG. 30). In addition, the starting prize winning counter 223d is initialized to 0 when the reproduction of the time-saving BGM as BGM is started (S2148 in FIG. 28). Therefore, the ball that entered the first ball entrance 64 during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM can be stocked using the starting winning counter 223d.

In addition, when the value of the starting prize winning counter 223d becomes 3, even if there is a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 (even if the pending ball number command is received), the entered ball is not counted. (S2009 in FIG. 25). In other words, do not stock more than three balls entering the first ball entrance 64 .

In this pachinko machine 10, since the ball entry sound is produced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the time-saving BGM, when many balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 are stocked, the ball is finally stocked. The pronunciation of the ball-entering sound for the ball-entering is performed with a large delay from the actual ball-entering, and the difference between the timing of the actual ball-entering and the pronunciation of the ball-entering sound becomes conspicuous, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk that you will get caught. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of balls entering the first ball hole 64 to three balls, the difference between the actual ball entering and the sounding timing of the entering ball sound is suppressed from becoming noticeable. can.

Also, if the tempo (the number of beats per minute) of the time-saving BGM is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Munute), the ball is fired less than 100 balls per minute, so the time for one beat is It can be said that it is almost impossible for the number of balls entering the first winning hole 64 to be stocked in excess of three. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is restricted so as not to exceed three, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 with no ball entrance sound cannot actually occur. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity due to the fact that the ball-entering sound is not produced.

Note that the upper limit of the number of stocks may be changed according to the tempo of the time-saving BGM, assuming that the number of balls shot within a predetermined period of time is constant. For example, when the tempo of the time-saving BGM is 100 BPM, the number of beats per minute is smaller than when the tempo is 160 BPM, so the timing at which the ball hitting sound is produced is also reduced. Therefore, the number of incoming balls to be stocked may be set to four, for example. As a result, ball-entering sounds can be generated for more ball-entering.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of stocks is determined for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the ball-entering sound is generated. good. In this case, as described above, when many balls entering the first ball opening 64 are stocked, the sound of the ball entering the last stocked ball is produced with a large delay from the actual ball entering. The player can immerse himself in the afterglow of the player's entering the ball by the melody played by the delayed ball-entering sound.

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is a flag indicating that the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is, for example, the possibility of a big win in the variable effect by having the player repeatedly hit the frame button 22 and displaying a predetermined character on the third symbol display device 81. or when developing from normal ready-to-win to super ready-to-win, the third pattern display device 81 displays a super ready-to-win playing mode selection screen during normal ready-to-win, and the player selects the super ready-to-win playing mode. It includes performance.

The frame button operation flag 223e indicates that an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed when it is ON, and an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed when it is OFF. indicates no

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when power is turned on. Then, when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is started during the variable effect, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON (S2139 in FIG. 28). Also, when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 ends, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141 in FIG. 29).

In the present embodiment, when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, an operation to inform that the frame button 22 has been operated is performed. Sound is output from the audio output device 226 . The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the operation sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the BGM.

Specifically, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is ON, the MPU 221 executes frame button operation sound output processing (S2137 in FIG. 27), and receives a signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated. Then, the information is stocked first. The MPU 221 also manages the beat timing of the BGM sounded by the audio output device 226 . Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM or at the timing between the beats (back beat), the sound output device 226 emits an operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation.

As a result, since the operation sound is produced in time with the beat of the BGM, sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game while rhythmically operating the frame buttons 22 to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, when the player continuously operates the frame button 22, the MPU 221 outputs an operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation from the audio output device 226 not only at the beat timing of the BGM but also at the back beat timing. pronounce. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be created by the operation sound, so that the player can enjoy the operation of the frame button 22 even more.

In addition, the MPU 221 also determines the pitch of the operation sound based on the code (chord) of the BGM at the timing of sounding the operation sound in the same manner as the sound of entering the ball when reproducing the time-saving BGM. do. As a result, the operation sound and the BGM form chords while matching the rhythm, so that the player can hear a more pleasant sound. In addition, when the player continues to operate the frame button 22, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of the operation sound and made to be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of operation and the number of times of operation. Therefore, in order to listen to various melodies played by the operation sound from time to time, the player will have a desire to operate the frame buttons 22 in various rhythms. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the MPU 221, similarly to the pronunciation of the ball-entering sound during playback of the time-saving BGM, continuously reproduces the operation sounds corresponding to the operations stocked in the same code in the BGM three times. The pitches of the sound and the third operation sound are selected from the component sounds, and the second operation sound is selected from the transition sound that connects the first and third component sounds in musical scale.

As a result, while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM, the operation sounds are generated while inserting the operation sounds whose pitches are the transitional sounds between the operation sounds whose pitches are the constituent sounds of the chords of the BGM. Variations can be given to the melody of the operation sound accompanied by BGM. Therefore, the melody by the operation sound does not become monotonous, and the voice output can be performed so as not to bore the player.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is not performed while the time-saving BGM is being reproduced. That is, during the period in which the ball-entering sound indicating the ball entering the first ball-entering hole 64 is produced, the operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is not produced.

The frame button operation number counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When a signal indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is input to the MPU 221, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1907 in FIG. 24) executed in the main processing, the frame button operation frequency counter 223f 1 is added, and the operation to the frame button 22 is stocked.

Then, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is ON and the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, the frame button operation ON output is performed. Processing is executed (S2137 in FIG. 27), and if the value of the frame button operation counter 223f is greater than or equal to 1 at the timing of the beat of the BGM, that is, if the operation of the frame button 22 is stocked, the beat of that beat is performed. At the timing, processing is performed to generate an operation sound having a pitch equal to one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code at that time. As a result, the operation sound representing the operation of the frame button 22 can be produced in accordance with the beats and chords of the BGM, allowing the player to listen to rhythmic and pleasant sounds.

Further, when the value of the frame button operation number counter 223f is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the operation sound is produced in the previous beat, the BGM code at the timing of the back beat and the following On the condition that the chord of the BGM at the timing of the beat is the same chord, processing is performed to produce an operation sound having a pitch equal to that of the chord. As a result, when the operation of the frame button 22 continues, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the backbeat of the BGM, so that the complicated rhythm of the operation sound can be carved. Also, in the timing of the beat before and after, the operation sound is pronounced with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord. As described above, it is possible to give variation to the melody of the operation sound.

The frame button operation number counter 223f is decremented by 1 when an operation sound is produced. The frame button operation number counter 223f is also initialized to 0 when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on (S2139 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the period during which an effect requiring operation of the frame button is being performed, the operation can be stocked by the frame button operation frequency counter 223f.

Further, when the value of the frame button operation number counter 223f becomes 3, even if the frame button 22 is operated, the operation is not counted. In other words, operations on the frame button 22 are not stocked beyond three.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the operation sound is produced in accordance with the BGM beat (or back beat), when many frame button 22 operations are stocked, the operation sound corresponding to the last stocked operation is produced. This is because the operation is performed with a large delay from the actual operation, and the difference between the timing of the actual operation and the sounding of the operation sound becomes noticeable, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of operations to the frame buttons 22 to three, it is possible to suppress the difference between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound from becoming noticeable.

Note that an operation detection invalid period may be provided for the operation of the frame button 22 . That is, when an operation of the frame button 22 is detected, even if the frame button 22 is operated for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), the operation may be invalidated. As a result, although the frame button 22 has been operated once, it is detected that the frame button 22 has been operated based on the vibration caused by that operation, and is recognized as an operation different from the operation intended by the player. can be suppressed. When this operation detection invalid period is provided, for example, when an operation detection invalid period of 0.2 seconds is provided, even if the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly, the frame button 22 is operated for at least 0.2 seconds. is invalidated, if the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 375 milliseconds), the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is two at most. Therefore, in this case, there is no particular need to set an upper limit for the number of times the frame button 22 is operated.

Also, the operation detection invalid period may be set according to the tempo of the BGM. For example, if the BGM tempo is 120 BPM (one beat cycle is 500 milliseconds), the operation detection invalid period is set to 0.25 seconds, and the BGM tempo is 150 BPM (one beat cycle is 400 milliseconds). ), the operation detection invalid period may be set to 0.2 seconds. As a result, the number of operations of the frame buttons 22 that are stocked during one beat is at most two, so that operation sounds are generated using the timing of the BGM beat and back beat without setting an upper limit for the stock. By doing so, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation sound can be produced without delay.

The pointer 223g is for designating an address defining various control information to be acquired at a certain time from a data table defining various control information to be executed in the sound lamp control device 113 in chronological order. A data table is prepared for each effect whose execution is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and data tables corresponding to all effects are stored in the data table storage area 222b (see FIG. 6) provided in the program ROM 222. be done.

When the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command received from the main controller 110, it reads out the data table corresponding to the determined effect from the data table storage area 222b. According to the read data table, the MPU 221 outputs audio from the audio output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation drive of the motor 87e).

At each address of the data table, control information to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 at the time indicated by the address is defined in order from address "0001H". That is, when the reproduction of a predetermined sound is to be started or stopped at the first time, the information for instructing the start or stop of the predetermined sound is defined in association with the address corresponding to the first time. . When a predetermined lamp is to be lit at the second time, information instructing lighting of the predetermined lamp is defined in association with the address corresponding to the second time. At the third time, when driving the first role object vertical motion motor 87a to lower the first role object 87 by a predetermined step, the address corresponding to the third time is associated with the first Information for driving the first accessory vertical motion motor 87a is defined so as to lower the accessory 87 by a predetermined step.

The pointer 223g is once initialized to 0 when the effect to be executed is determined by the MPU 221 and the use of the data table corresponding to the effect is determined (S2147 in FIG. 27). Then, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the pointer 223g before reading the control information from the data table, and reads the control information corresponding to the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition in the data table. Then, according to the contents instructed by the control information, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting and blinking of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first role object 87 (the first role object vertical movement motor 87a and the first role object drive of the rotation motor 87e).

Here, after the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113, when newly reading out the data table corresponding to the effect, the reading is started at the beat of the BGM ( S2123 in FIG. 27). Further, when the pointer 223g is counted up (added by 1) and the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read from the data table, this is also performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 starts or stops the audio output from the audio output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, operates the first role object 87 (the first role object vertical movement motor 87a and the second It is possible to start the driving of the motor 87e for rotating 1 role item, etc. at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the operation timing of the first role product 87 when making a one-shot announcement by the first role product 87 will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first role product 87. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, when a one-shot announcement is made by the first role object 87, the first role object 87 stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 descends by 80 steps in time with the beat of the BGM. Start. Then, when the descending of the first role object 87 is stopped in time with the beat of the BGM, the first role object 87 is moved up and down a plurality of times with a width of 20 steps. At this time, the stop/start of the ascending/descending of the first accessory 87 is also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Then, the first accessory 87 is finally lowered to the maximum point position in time with the beat of the BGM, and the rotation of the first accessory 87 is started at the maximum position also in time with the beat of the BGM.

In this way, after the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when newly reading out the data table corresponding to the effect, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the beat of the BGM. , the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is also read from the data table at the timing of the beat of the BGM. can be operated in time with the beat of the Therefore, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect execution timing of the variable effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is pseudo-run as an example of the variable effect.

The start of the variable effect is based on the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 if the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not suspended, or when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. When the ball entry is suspended, it is determined based on the end timing of the variation performance or the big win performance that has been performed immediately before, and cannot be matched with the beat timing of the BGM.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating it up and down from the original fluctuation start timing to the beat timing of the BGM (symbol fluctuation period). Then, when the timing of the first beat of the BGM arrives from the original variation start timing, at that timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation performance is started, and , causes the third pattern display device 81 to start the high-speed variation of the third pattern.

A display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound that matches the display of the effect image, and the lighting and blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table, and these are also defined in the BGM as described above. It is done in time with the beat. For example, in the variable effect by the pseudo-continuation shown in FIG. 11, the chance-up image indicating that the variable effect is stopped in a simulated manner and the variation is performed again is output in time with the beat of the BGM. In addition, sound output corresponding to the chance-up image and lighting/blinking of the lamp are also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

Furthermore, in the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmation display is performed, the third pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the stopped display is indicated. The audio output device 226 is caused to produce a stop sound representing the current state. After that, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating it up and down (pattern shaking period) until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the third pattern is fixedly displayed at the original fixed display timing.

In this way, the variable effect is originally started and displayed definitely regardless of the beat of the BGM. Stop display. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of the high-speed fluctuation, and from the temporary stop display to the original fixed display timing, the third pattern is vibrated up and down as a symbol shaking period. conduct. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in time with the beat of the BGM, and the player can see as if a stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variable effect can also be displayed in time with the beat of the BGM. It can be done in time with the beat. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the game can be played rhythmically and the interest of the player can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. The timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the BGM beat cycle. The MPU 221 uses the timer counter 223h to determine the timing of beats and backbeats of the BGM being reproduced. The timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 when the BGM reproduced by the audio output device 113 is changed and reproduction of the changed BGM is started (S2146 of S28). At this time, the MPU 221 reads out the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced (the number of beats per minute) from the ROM 222 and calculates the beat cycle T (milliseconds) therefrom. The beat period T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds/(BGM tempo).

It should be noted that the tempo of BGM is defined in advance in the ROM 222 for all BGM reproduced by the audio ramp control device 113 . Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the beat period T is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. Accordingly, as will be described later, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined simply by performing a process of incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every millisecond.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the tempo of all BGM reproduced by the audio ramp control device 113 is defined in the ROM 222 in advance. The beat cycle T may be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. In this case, the beat cycle T of each BGM defined in the ROM 222 may be determined to be a multiple of 2 milliseconds.

After that, the timer counter 223h is incremented by 1 during the sound editing/output process executed every 1 millisecond. However, if the value of the timer counter 223h matches the beat cycle T, instead of adding 1, 1 is set. As a result, the beat cycle of the BGM is counted by the timer counter 223h.

When the value of the timer counter 223h is T, the MPU 221 reads the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the set data table as the BGM beat timing, and outputs the control information from the audio output device 226. , the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first role product 87 (driving the first role product vertical movement motor 87a and the first role product rotation motor 87e). As a result, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first role object 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

Also, when time-saving BGM is being played back as BGM, when there is a prize at the first ball entrance 64, the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T/2, corresponding to the prize. Control to pronounce the winning sound to be played. When an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, when the operation of the frame button 22 occurs, at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T/2, the operation is performed. Control to generate the corresponding operation sound. Therefore, since the ball-entering sound and the operation sound are produced at the timing of the beat and backbeat of the BGM, the player can hear the ball-entering sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

The transition tone sounding flag 223j is a flag indicating that a ball-entering sound or an operation sound having the pitch of the chord transition tone on the back beat of the BGM has been generated. If it is off, it indicates that the pitch of the passing sound is not generated.

The transition sound generation flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-on process (see FIG. 23).

When the timing of the backbeat comes, the MPU 221 determines that the number of ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 or the number of operations of the frame button 22 that have been sounded in the immediately preceding beat and that the ball entry sound or operation sound has been produced and the number of operations of the frame button 22 If it is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the BGM chord in the previous beat matches the BGM chord in the immediately following beat. Note that the progression of chords for all BGM is stored in the program ROM 222 in advance, and the MPU 221 can grasp the beat chords of the BGM according to the progress of reproduction of the BGM.

In this case, when it is determined that the BGM chord on the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM chord on the immediately following beat, the MPU 221 inputs the pitch of the chord transition at the timing of the back beat. A ball sound or an operation sound is produced, and the transition sound production flag 223j is set to ON. Here, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound with a pitch of the passing sound is produced on the backbeat, as described above, at least two or more ball-entering or operation numbers are stocked. , the ball-entering sound or operation sound is always pronounced.

The MPU 221 refers to the transition sound generation flag 223j when the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is to be generated in the immediately following beat. Then, if the transition sound generation flag 223j is on, the ball-entering sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the transition sound is generated at the timing of the backbeat, so at the timing of the beat immediately after that, the sounded transition sound is produced. A ball-entering sound or an operation sound having a pitch corresponding to a constituent sound corresponding to the sound is produced. As a result, when a ball-entry sound or operation sound whose pitch is the pitch of the component sound is pronounced on the next beat after the passing sound of the back beat, the pitch that deviates from the passing sound that was pronounced on the back beat is pronounced. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strange melody from being generated when the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is produced while inserting the transitional sound.

The pitch information memory 223k is a memory for storing the sounded pitch when the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is sounded at the beat of the BGM. When the MPU 221 decides to pronounce the ball-entering sound or the operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat, the MPU 221 stores the pitch in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166 in FIG. 29).

Here, after an entering sound or an operation sound having a pitch of the constituent sound of a chord is produced on the beat of a certain BGM, an entering sound having a pitch of the passing sound of the same chord is produced at the timing of the following BGM backbeat. Alternatively, when an operation sound is produced and, at the timing of the beat of the next BGM, a ball-entering sound or an operation sound having the pitch of the sound constituting the same chord is produced, the pachinko machine 10 does not play back beats. The pitches of the note and the constituent notes on the next beat are determined based on the pitches of the constituent notes on the first beat. The correspondence between the pitches of the constituent sounds on the first beat and the pitches of the transitional sounds on the back beat and the pitches of the constituent sounds on the next beat are provided in the program 222 for each chord that can be taken in the BGM. It is defined in the sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6).

For example, in the pitch setting table 222c for playback of the elapsed tone, the chord "C" is associated with the component tone "do" on the first beat, and the elapsed tone on the backbeat is "re", and the next beat is "re". ``mi'' is specified as the constituent tone of the first beat, and corresponding to the constituent tone ``mi'' of the first beat, ``fa'' is the transitional tone of the backbeat, and ``so'' is the constituent tone of the next beat. In association with the constituent tone "So" on the first beat, "Fa" is defined as the passing tone on the back beat and "Mi" is defined as the constituent tone on the next beat. For the chord "D", associating with the constituent tone "re" on the first beat, specifying "mi" as the passing tone on the back beat and "fa ♯" as the constituent tone on the next beat, Corresponding to the constituent note ``F#'' on the first beat, specify ``So'' as the passing tone on the back beat and ``La'' as the constituent tone on the next beat, and specify the constituent tone on the first beat `` Corresponding to "La", "So" is defined as the passing tone on the back beat, and "F#" is defined as the constituent tone on the next beat. Also, for the chord "F", it is associated with the constituent note "Fa" on the first beat, and defines "So" as the passing note on the backbeat and "La" as the constituent note on the next beat. , correspond to the constituent note ``La'' on the first beat, and specify ``Shi'' as the passing tone on the back beat, and ``Do'' as the constituent tone on the next beat, and define the constituent tone `` Corresponding to "do", "si" is defined as the passing tone on the backbeat and "la" is defined as the constituent tone on the next beat.

For example, when the chord on the beat of a certain BGM is "C" and the pitch of the component sound "mi" is generated at that time, the MPU 221 generates the pitch "mi" of the pitch "mi". is stored in the pitch information memory 223k. At the timing of the backbeat of the following BGM, when a ball-entering sound or operation sound having the pitch of the chord "C" passing sound is to be produced, the pitch information memory 223k reads the ball-entering sound or operation sound produced on the immediately preceding beat. (in this example, "mi"), and in the code "C", the pitch of the transition tone corresponding to the constituent tone "mi" is specified from the transition tone reproduction pitch setting table 222c. In this example, "fa" is specified as the pitch of the passing sound, and a ball-entering sound or operation sound having the pitch of the passing sound "fa" is produced at the timing of the back beat.

Furthermore, when the pitch of the pitch of the chord “C” is played at the timing of the beat of the next BGM following the backbeat, it is also possible to produce a ball-entering sound or an operation sound (that is, when the transition sound generation flag 223j is turned on). case), from the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the entering sound or the operation sound pronounced on the immediately preceding beat is read out ("mi" in this example), and the chord "C" corresponds to the constituent sound "mi". The pitch of the component sound in the next beat is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound. In this example, "So" is specified as the pitch of the component sound in the next beat, and the ball-entering sound or operation sound with the pitch of the component sound "So" is produced at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the following back beat, and the following beat, the ball-entering sound or operation sound is produced in the order of "Mi", "Fa", and "So" corresponding to the BGM code "C". be. Therefore, when the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the chord constituent sound is pronounced on the backbeat between the beats on which the pitch of the entering sound or the manipulation sound is pronounced, , it is possible to suppress the production of a passing tone with a strange pitch, and the production of a pitch that deviates from the passing tone pronounced on the back beat on the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the pitching sound or the operation sound is produced while inserting the transitional sound.

RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. In addition, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is made. (see S2102 in FIG. 26).

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the first role object vertical motion motor 87a, the first role object rotation motor 87b, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. connected to each other.

The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that is directly connected to the MPU 221 , generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 221 , and outputs the generated sound from the sound output device 226 . An audio data ROM 306 is connected to the audio output LSI 301 . The voice data ROM 306 is a memory storing various voice data.

When a reproduction start command is set by the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 identifies the sound to be reproduced contained in the reproduction start command, reads the audio data corresponding to the identified sound from the audio data ROM 306, and reproduces it. A sound to be generated is generated, and the generated sound is output from the audio output device 226 . Further, when the MPU 221 sets a reproduction end command, the MPU 221 specifies the sound included in the reproduction end command whose reproduction should be ended, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 301 has 16 playback channels, and can simultaneously generate up to 16 sounds, synthesize (mix) them, and output them from the sound output device 226 .

Note that the data format stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be arbitrary. For example, it may be a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or data compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). may be

Alternatively, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 306 . In this case, the sound output LSI 301 has a MIDI sound source, reads a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound for which the MPU 221 instructs to start reproduction from the sound data ROM 306, and causes the MIDI sound source to produce sound according to the read MIDI file. to play the sound.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input/output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. is doing.

The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input/output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio lamp control device. 113.

MPU 231 , program ROM 232 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are also connected to input/output port 238 via bus line 240 . A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237 and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the sound lamp control device 113 . The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 also has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in the presentation corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 identifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and reads out the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled according to the read display data table.

Details of the display data table will now be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the variable effect, demonstration effect, A display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

Incidentally, the demonstration effect is a effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. A third pattern composed of main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The fixed display effect is performed by the third pattern display device 81 when the stop pattern is fixedly displayed by receiving a fixed command (display fixed command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. This is the presentation that will be displayed. For example, if the stopped symbol is a missing symbol, the effect of emphasizing the missing is performed, and if the stopped symbol is any of 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. A performance is held. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing this fixed display effect.

In the restart effect, a predetermined position is set during the period from when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect indicated by the variable pattern command until the confirmation command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. This is an effect of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an image in which the third pattern is vibrated (oscillated) at the center. When the player visually recognizes that the third pattern is vibrated and displayed after the variation of the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the stop pattern is not decided at that time. can be recognized.

The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table each corresponding to the demonstration effect and the restart effect. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation presentation, is prepared one by one according to a combination of a set variation presentation pattern and a stop symbol. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect, there is a table for confirming and displaying the winning pattern as a stop pattern, a table for confirming and displaying a variable probability jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot). ) are respectively prepared.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for variation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back face type is any one of back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 (one of "town stage", "sea stage", and "mountain stage"). or to specify whether to display a rear image different from rear faces A to C. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn when the back face type specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. Display state information indicating whether to display the rear image may also be defined. The rear image is displayed with its display range, brightness, color, etc. changing with the lapse of time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the initial state was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information was displayed.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the image based on this display data table on the third pattern display device 81) was started. may In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third pattern display device 81). Based on the state of the rear image displayed at the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third pattern display device 81) was started Identify.

Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image corresponding to the initial state and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or rendering of the image based on the display data table) according to the back surface type. Display on the third pattern display device 81) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start, or along with the back surface type and display state information, the type information of the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating the address where the back image to be displayed is stored instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number is attached to each of the third symbols for identifying each. For example, a main symbol of "0" is assigned an identification number of "0", a main symbol of "1" is assigned an identification number of "1", and a main symbol of "2" is assigned an identification number of " 2” is attached.

In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the stop of the variation effect that was performed one before. Offset information with the identification number of the pattern is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, as the pattern type information at each address, the identification information of the third pattern to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop pattern of the previous variable effect are displayed. Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information of As a result, the variable performance can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

As the pattern type information, the offset information from the stop pattern of the variable effect performed one before is switched to the identification number of the third pattern to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time displayed fluctuates. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. The selected display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and stored in a display data table buffer 233a provided in the work RAM 233, which will be described later, and a pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, as the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed in the display control device 114 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table defining display contents of an additional effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 for one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. be. In the additional data table storage area 232b, an additional data table is prepared and stored for each effect to be additionally displayed.

Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect includes.

That is, the additional data table contains drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is normally not displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. , the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect. is.

Details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail. The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and so on according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

In the example of FIG. 14, a sprite type (character type: first role) is assigned to one character (character 1: corresponding to an image of a movable character) in association with the address "0097H" defined in the display data table. object, second accessory, etc.), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0001H" in FIG. 14).

The display contents defined by the additional data table include, for example, the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. The additional data table defines the display contents for displaying the forewarning effect image that is additionally displayed.

As with the display data table, "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table. ”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table are drawn. is described.

The MPU 231 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113, and when it is determined to display an additional effect by the received command to the effect whose display was started earlier, the MPU 231 corresponds to the added effect. The additional data table is read from the additional data table storage area 232b and stored in an additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233, which will be described later.

Each time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, the content of the image to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 adds various sprites defined at address "0097H" of the display data table to address "0097H" of the additional data table. The character 1 sprite is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is "0001H", Null data is specified at the address "0001H" of the additional data table. 0001H" to generate a drawing list based on various sprites.

Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, , in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233c indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

By transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. The prescribed image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When displaying another effect image (for example, an image simulating the first role object) in addition to the effect image (for example, the variable effect image), an addition corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, it is possible to temporarily display an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. By specifying separately, 32+2=34 types of displays and additional data tables can be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily achieve further diversification of the effects images.

Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by defining other effect images to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even when it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b From the table, while updating the pointer 233c at each time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and to easily obtain one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. can be generated to Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentation displays from a small number of data tables.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. This work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a clock counter 233e.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. , and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c by 1, and based on the rendering content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

The additional data table buffer 233b is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing additional data tables corresponding to effects. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 temporarily writes Null data indicating that there is no additional display object to be displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear contents.

After that, the MPU 231, based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, adds the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. If there is an effect to be added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

While incrementing the pointer 233c one by one, the MPU 231 adds the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the drawing contents stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the added data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) is generated in which the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 are described for each frame. . As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, since Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table. is displayed as is.

The pointer 233c is for designating an address for acquiring corresponding drawing contents from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. During the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer An update process is executed (see S2905 in the drawing, FIG. 42), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by one (see S2981 in FIG. 42).

Every time the pointer 233c is updated, the MPU 231 extracts the address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. , and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, that The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

The drawing list area 233d allows the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the address in the storage area 234a. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement/reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semi-transparency according to the semi-transparency value. processing, compositing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, color correction processing according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. Above, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237 .

The MPU 231 extracts the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the contents of (for example, a pending image that displays the number of pending balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information ) is generated, and a drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of sprite (display object) data depends on the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately obtains the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. , and that information can be easily included in the draw list details.

In addition, the MPU 231 stores other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table and additional data. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The clock counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (Fig. 32(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S2603, see FIG. 39) is executed. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The character ROM 235 has a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in compressed form in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the image data before compression consists of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of frame buffer areas for storing one frame of images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

The image controller 236 generates one frame of image data in accordance with the drawing list, writes it into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and reads the one frame of image data written into the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. , and outputs the read image data to the third pattern display device 81 through the output port 239, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to continuously display a plurality of frame images.

The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame of image data into one of the frame buffer areas and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When one frame of image data has been read out from the other frame buffer area, the one frame of image data previously written in one frame buffer area is read out. Image data for the next one frame is written into the frame buffer area of .

By alternately writing image data into and reading out image data from one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images can be continuously displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 16 to 22. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (every 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Main processing will be explained.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S1101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 899, 99, 99, 250) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance 64, the starting prize winning process is executed (S1105). The details of the variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19, respectively.

After executing the starting prize-winning process, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, the variation process (S1104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S1201). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If it is not during the jackpot (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating. (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), this processing is terminated. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1203, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (variable display pending ball number N held in the main controller 110) is greater than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side. →reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 .

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), the state where the demonstration effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, , it is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than 0 Identifies the interval as being in demonstration.

If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S1208: No), the demo command is set (S1209), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S1208: Yes) This process is terminated as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 transmits this demonstration command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display the demonstration effect according to this demonstration command.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has passed after the variable stop, the demonstration command can be set and the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display the demonstration effect.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the processing of S1206, it is determined whether or not a big win according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if it is a big win, the first winning type Depending on the value of the counter C2, either a 15R probability variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds). It is determined whether it is a pattern that will be a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability) or a pattern that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds will shift to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variable jackpot is achieved after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, the red LED is illuminated, and when the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, the red LED and the blue LED are lit. , and the LED of . In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the stop of the variable display.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it directly transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 . When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops varying, and by receiving the determination command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S1207). This fluctuation start process (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , "big win" or "loss" lottery (win/fail judgment) is performed, and the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not the game is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, "7,307,582" corresponding to the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random value, and the pachinko machine When the ten game states are high probability states, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892” are the jackpot random numbers. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random numbers, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. discriminate.

Then, as a result of the process of S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot is hit (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, A display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 2 The display mode of the first pattern display device 37 ( lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the third pattern display device 81 stops and displays the jackpot patterns corresponding to various jackpots. is set as

Next, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of the big hit is determined (S1303). The determination of this variation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the win is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode when the game is out is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-order reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order. In this embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. there is

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1305). The determination of this variation pattern is based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state, during time saving, or low probability state excluding during time saving), the stop type set in the process of S1302, and the change type counter CS1 and the deviation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When the processing of S1303 or the processing of S1305 is finished, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305 (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 22). be.

Next, the starting winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S1105). This starting winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and determines whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). , and executes the pending processing of the values indicated by various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls in the variable effect reserved in the main controller 110) is It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, if the number of operation pending balls N<4 (S1402: No) , return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and if the number of reserved balls N<4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) 1 is added (S1403), and each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is stored in the empty reservation area of the reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. stored in the first area among them (S1404).

Next, a pending ball number command including the pending ball number N updated by the processing of S1403 is created (S1405), the created pending ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is terminated, and timer allocation is performed. return to processing. This pending ball number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 22). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls in the voice ramp control device 113 based on the number of pending balls N included in the number of pending balls command.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also the process proceeds to S1611.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1612, S1613).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1612, S1613) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to return the payout control device 111 to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S1701). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening (large open) of the variable winning device 65 A large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the opening 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1706, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 20 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (S1711). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 23, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1918 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 24), it executes power-off processing in S1918. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1918 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1918. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), it will transfer to S1804 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1918 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S1918, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1918 is executed (see S1917 in FIG. 24). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1918 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1809) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1810), an interrupt Permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1810), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clear processing of S1809 is skipped is that when the processing of S1808 is reached from S1804 via the processing of S1806, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has passed since the process of S1901 was executed last time (S1901). - The process of S1913 is skipped without performing the process of S1911.

In the process of S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1902 to S1912 are processes related to display, sound, and setting of the action of the first role object 87 (that is, setting of effect), and a short cycle ( This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1913 and the command determination processing in S1914 in a short cycle, while there is no need to edit within 1 ms). By executing the process of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

Note that when the processing of S1901 is executed for the first time after the main processing is started after the start-up processing, the processing proceeds directly to S1902 without determining whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, when the processing of S1901 is executed for the first time after the main processing is started after the start-up processing, the processing of S1902 may be shifted to the processing of S1902 assuming that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1901.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1907 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed.

In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1907 is omitted.

In addition, when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated using the frame button operation number counter 223f is also performed to monitor the frame button input.・Done in production processing. As a result, the operation of the frame button 22 is stocked according to the frame button operation count 223f. The operation of the frame button 22 stocked here is used for outputting an operation sound for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated in time with the beat of the BGM.

After the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1907) ends, sound editing/output processing is executed (S1908). In the sound editing/output process, according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110, and according to the state of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22, the sound is generated. It specifies the sound to be output from the output device 226 , controls the sound output LSI 301 , and executes processing for outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 . Details of this sound editing/output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, lamp edit processing is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110, and according to the state of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22, the third symbol The lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the display device 81 .

Next, the first role product editing driving process is executed (S1910). In the first role product editing drive process, the first role product vertical movement motor 87a and the first role product rotation motor 87e are driven and controlled according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, By operating the first role product 87, the advance notice effect by the first role product 87 is executed.

After the processing of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1911), after that the counter updating processing is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Further, the sound editing/output processing of S1908 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated during this counter update process. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment) and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process of temporarily storing data for transmission, is executed. The details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1914). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1914 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off processing is executed (S1918). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1919), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Further, the sound output from the audio output device 226 does not change, and the lighting/blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1914). This command determination process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . In addition, this processing also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the pending ball number command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (variation A to F, 2R variation) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. .

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command, and according to the notified detailed variation pattern, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect. done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted, It is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command (that is, The number of pending balls of variable effect) is extracted and stored in the pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , the value of the reserved pitch counter 223 a of the voice lamp controller 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203 a of the main controller 110 . Therefore, even if the value of the pending ball number counter 223a of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice ramp control device 113 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223 a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Further, after the process of S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a updated by the process of S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number.

Next, it is determined whether or not the starting winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009). If the starting winning counter 223d is not 3 (S2009: No), 1 is added to the starting winning counter 223d (S2010), and the process returns to the main process. . Also, if the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009: Yes), the process of S2010 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

By the processing of S2010, 1 is added to the starting winning prize counter 223d in accordance with the reception of the reserved ball number command. Since the reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the starting prize winning counter 223d The number of (starting winnings) is counted. In other words, the sound ramp control device 113 stocks the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 by the starting prize winning counter 223d.

When the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on and the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 stocked here is at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM. , is used to pronounce a ball-entering sound having a pitch that is one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code for time saving at that time. As a result, the ball entering the first ball hole 64 is pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear rhythmic and pleasant sounds. .

In addition, when the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 stocked in the starting prize winning counter 223d reaches 3 by the determination in S2009, the starting prize winning counter 223d no longer enters the first ball entrance 64. Even if a ball is not stocked and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that ball is invalidated from the viewpoint of counting by the starting winning prize counter 223d.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the ball entry sound is produced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the time-saving BGM, when many balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 are stocked, the ball is finally stocked. The pronunciation of the ball-entering sound for the ball-entering is performed with a large delay from the actual ball-entering, and the difference between the timing of the actual ball-entering and the pronunciation of the ball-entering sound becomes conspicuous, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk that you will get caught. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of balls entering the first ball hole 64 to three balls, the difference between the actual ball entering and the sounding timing of the entering ball sound is suppressed from becoming noticeable. can.

Also, if the tempo (the number of beats per minute) of the time-saving BGM is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Munute), the ball is fired less than 100 balls per minute, so the time for one beat is It is almost impossible for the number of balls entering the first winning hole 64 to exceed three balls to be stocked. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is restricted so as not to exceed three, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 with no ball entrance sound cannot actually occur. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity due to the fact that the ball-entering sound is not produced.

As a result of the process of S2006, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2011), and shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command and the confirmation command received from the main controller 110 are set as the display demonstration command and the confirmation command for display by the process of S2011, and are transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

Next, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1913).

This variable display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable effect. In order to do so, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and a display stop type for transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control device 114 This is the process of generating commands. In addition, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is updated with the display of the variable effect, and a pending ball number command for display is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated pending ball number.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have not been received from the main controller 110, this Terminate the variable display process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25) The variation pattern type (any of variation A to F and 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is read, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the variation pattern type and the stop type obtained from the processing of S2103, and the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, The detailed variation pattern is determined based on the probability variation state or the time saving state) and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

The variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 specifies only the variation time. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed from now on.

In addition, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 includes the stop types indicated by the stop type commands received so far (15R variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R variable jackpot, front-back out reach, front-back out reach, complete loss), It can be determined based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, when a 15R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot is indicated as a stop type in a stop type command corresponding to a certain variable performance, the pachinko machine 10 is operated after the jackpot performance after the variable performance until the next big win. It is determined that the game state is a variable probability state. In addition, when a 15R normal jackpot is indicated as a stop type in a stop type command corresponding to a certain variable performance, after the big win performance after the variable performance, the variable performance is performed 100 times, or the next big win. The game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time-saving state until it becomes. After 100 times of variation presentation, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big win.

In addition, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 after the big win (variable probability state or time saving state) is included in the ending command (command for performing an effect indicating the end of the big win) transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end of the big win. In addition, the voice ramp control device 113 may determine the game state of the pachinko machine 10 from the game state included in this ending command. At this time, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 after the big win included in the ending command is the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set until the variable performance is performed 100 times, and then until the next big win. Judged as normal.

In the process of S2104, when the detailed variation pattern is determined, then a display variation pattern command is generated for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern, and the command is sent to the display control device 114 temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to (S2105). Also, a stop type command for display is generated for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2106).

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the variable effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop pattern that matches the stop type, and when the variable effect started by the display variation pattern command is displayed, the display control device 114 Display the selected stop symbol.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, is sent at the timing of the beat. The timing for starting the variable effect is determined under the control of the main controller 110 regardless of the rhythm of the BGM output by the audio ramp controller 113 .

However, the audio ramp controller 113 transmits the display variation pattern command generated by receiving the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. Therefore, the variation display of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started in time with the beat of the BGM.

In addition, in the variable display of the third pattern, the display control device 114 causes various characters to appear in accordance with the beat cycle of the BGM, displays an effect image, performs a pseudo stop, or performs a A display data table and an additional data table are stipulated so that a temporary stop display is performed at .

Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third pattern in time with the beat of the BGM, the appearance of various characters, the display of effect images, the pseudo stop, the temporary stop display before final display, etc. , are performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in time with the beat of the BGM, and the player can see as if a stop display was performed. Also, various effect images displayed during the variable effect can be displayed in time with the beat of the BGM.

Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the game can be played rhythmically and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the value of the held ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the held ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the held ball is set) according to the setting of the display variation pattern command. (S2107), a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the pending ball number indicated by the updated value of the pending ball number counter 223a is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, a data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined by the process of S2104 is identified (S2109). In the MPU 221, according to the data table specified here, while matching the variation effect of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the sound output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 228, It controls the operation of the first role product 87 .

Then, a display variation start command for notifying the start of the variation effect to the display control device 114 is set (S2110), and the process returns to the main process. The display variation start command set here is sent to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the display variation pattern command generated by the processing of S2104 is not transmitted until the timing of the beat of the BGM. The variable display of the third pattern is not executed until the timing of the beat of the BGM. However, the start timing of the variable effect is determined by the main controller 110 regardless of the timing of the beat of the BGM. Then, the third symbol display device 81 must start the variable display of the third symbol.

When the pachinko machine 10 receives the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, it once transmits a variation start command for display to the display control device 114 by the processing of S2110. The display control device 114 receives this display variation start command and starts the variation effect by displaying the third symbol to vibrate up and down. After that, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM, thereby starting the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display from the timing of the beat of the BGM. to start the variable display of the third symbol. As a result, the player can see as if the variable performance was started in time with the beat of the BGM.

Next, sound editing/output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing this sound editing/output processing (S1908). As described above, the sound editing/output processing is performed according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110, and according to the state of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22. In response, the audio to be output from the audio output device 226 is specified, the audio output LSI 301 is controlled, and processing for outputting various sounds from the audio output device 226 is executed.

First, referring to FIG. 27, when execution of the sound editing/output process is started, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the beat period T of the BGM being reproduced. When the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T (S2121: Yes), is determined to be the timing of the beat, and then execution of a new effect is determined according to the command from the main controller 110 by the process of S2109 of the variable display process (see FIG. 26). It is determined whether or not the data table to be used has been specified (S2122).

The data table is a table in which various types of control information to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are defined in chronological order. It is a thing.

In the process of S2122, if it is determined that the data table to be used has been identified (S2122: Yes), use of the identified data table is set (S2123), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S2124), The process proceeds to S2125.

While sequentially counting up the pointer 223g initialized in S2124, the MPU 221 stores various control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set to be used in S2123 in the data table storage area. 222b, and in accordance with the control information, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, operation of the first accessory 87 (first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and first accessory rotating motor 87a) drive of the motor 87e).

Here, since the setting of the data table to be used is performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM, even if the effect to be executed according to the command from the main controller 110 is determined at any timing, the sound output corresponding to the effect is output. Sound output from the device 226, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first role object 87 can be started in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

As a result of the process of S2122, if the data table to be used is not specified (S2122: No), the processes of S2123 and S2124 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2125.

In the processing of S2125, it is determined whether or not there are the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command temporarily saved by the processing of S2105 and S2106 of the variation display processing (see FIG. 26) (S2125). Then, when the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are in the RAM 223 (S2125), the temporarily stored display variation pattern command is set for transmission to the display control device 114. (S2126), and the temporarily saved display stop type command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2127). Then, the process proceeds to S2128. The display variation start command set here is sent to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, but are reproduced. It is transmitted at the beat timing of the BGM. As a result, even if the main controller 110 decides to start the variable effect at an arbitrary timing, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is It can be started in time with the beat of the BGM.

Then, in the variable display of the third pattern, the display control device 114 causes various characters to appear in accordance with the cycle of the beat of the BGM, displays an effect image, performs a pseudo stop, or performs a A display data table and an additional data table are stipulated so that a temporary stop display is performed at . Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third pattern in time with the beat of the BGM, the appearance of various characters, the display of effect images, the pseudo-stop, the temporary stop display before final display, etc. can be performed. , can be performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the game can be played rhythmically and the interest of the player can be improved.

If it is determined by the process of S2125 that the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and display stop type command are not in the RAM 223 (S2125: No), the processes of S2126 and S2127 are skipped, and the process of S2128 is performed. Move to

In the process of S2128, 1 is added to the pointer 223g (S2128), and then, in the data table set by the process of S2123, the control information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read out (S2129). The MPU 221 counts up the pointer 223g by 1 and reads out the control information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table, thereby reproducing the sound based on the control information specified in chronological order by the data table. The editing/output processing, the lamp editing processing (S1909) of the main processing (see FIG. 24), and the first role item editing driving processing (S1910) allow audio output from the audio output device 226 and lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227. , to control the operation of the first role product 87 (drive of the first role product vertical movement motor 87a and the first role product rotation motor 87e).

Here, the processing of S2129 is performed at the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the process of S2129 includes sound reproduction start information (S2130). As a result, if there is sound reproduction start information (S2130: Yes), according to the sound reproduction start information, a reproduction start command including information on the sound for starting reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2131), and the process proceeds to S2132. Transition. The sound output LSI starts reproducing the sound indicated by the reproduction start command based on the set reproduction start command, and outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 .

In the process of S2130, if there is no sound reproduction start information (S2130: No), the process of S2131 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2132. In the process of S2132, it is determined whether or not the control information read out in the process of S2129 includes sound reproduction stop information (S2132). As a result, if there is sound reproduction stop information (S2132: Yes), according to the sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including information on the sound whose reproduction is to be stopped is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2133), and the process proceeds to S2134. Transition. The sound output LSI stops reproducing the sound indicated by the set reproduction stop command based on the reproduction stop command.

Here, the control information read out from the data table by the process of S2129 instructs to start or stop the reproduction of sounds other than BGM. That is, for sounds other than BGM, the processing of S2130 to S2133 enables the start and stop of reproduction of the sound at the timing of the beat of the BGM, allowing the player to play the game rhythmically. It should be noted that regardless of the timing of the beat of the BGM, the playback of the BGM sound is started and stopped at the timing of changing the BGM by the processing of S2143 (see FIG. 28) described later. is stopped, and the reproduction of new BGM is started.

When it is determined by the process of S2132 that there is no sound reproduction stop information (S2132: No), the process of S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2134. If the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the beat period T of the BGM as a result of the process of S2121 (S2121: No), the process of S2122 to S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134.

In the process of S2134, it is determined whether or not the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is ON (S2134), and if the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is ON (S2134: Yes), the start winning sound output process is executed (S2135). ). In the starting winning sound output process, when time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM, the ball-entering sound for notifying the ball entering the first ball-entering hole 64 is generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. This is a process of producing one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code for time saving at a pitch. The details of the start winning sound output process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

In the process of S2134, if it is determined that the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is off (S2134: No), or after the starting prize winning sound output process (S2135) is executed, then the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on. (S2136). As a result, if the frame button operation effect flag 223e is ON (S2136: Yes), frame button operation sound output processing is executed (S2137). In this frame button operation sound output processing, when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the beat or backbeat of the BGM being reproduced at that time. This is a process of producing an operation sound for notifying that the operation has been performed at a pitch that is one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code at that time. The frame button operation sound output process is similar to the starting winning sound output process, and the details thereof will be described after the starting winning sound output process.

In the process of S2136, if it is determined that the frame button operation effect flag 223e is off (S2136: No), or after the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, then the process of S2138 shown in FIG. Move to In the process of S2138, it is determined whether or not the control information read out by the process of S2129 (see FIG. 27) includes start information for an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 (S2138). Then, if there is start information for an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON, and the frame button operation number counter 223f is initialized to 0. (S2139). As a result, the above-described frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) is executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated during an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22, the operation sound is the beat or back beat of the BGM. The processing output at the timing is executed.

In the process of S2138, if it is determined that there is no start information for the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: No), or after the process of S2139 is executed, then S2129 (see FIG. 27) It is determined whether or not the control information read out by the process of 1) includes end information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140). Then, if there is end information for an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141). As a result, the execution of the process of outputting the operation sound of the frame button 22 at the timing of the beat or backbeat of the BGM ends.

In the process of S2140, if it is determined that there is no effect end information requiring operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), or after the process of S2141 is executed, then the value of the timer counter 223h is changed. Update (S2142). The timer counter 223h is updated by setting 1 when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the period T, Add 1 to the timer counter 223h. This allows the timer counter 223h to count the beat cycle of the BGM being reproduced.

Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the beat period T is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. As a result, it is possible to easily determine the timing of the beat of the BGM and the timing of the backbeat just by incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every 1 millisecond.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the BGM (S2143). The change timing of the BGM includes, for example, the timing to start playing the BGM output when a big win is announced and the timing to start or end the playing of the BGM for the big win effect, which is output during the big win effect. The ready-to-win effect is started in the effect, and there are a timing to start reproducing the ready-to-win effect BGM and a timing to end the reproduction of the ready-to-win effect BGM. These timings are grasped according to the control information defined in the data table set from time to time and the commands received from main controller 110 .

When it is determined that it is time to change the BGM by the process of S2143 (S2143), reproduction of the BGM specified by the control information of the data table or the BGM according to the command received from the main controller 110 is started. A command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2144). As a result, the designated BGM is started to be reproduced and output from the audio output device 226 .

Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which reproduction is started is read out from the ROM 222, and the beat period T (milliseconds) of the BGM is calculated and stored in the RAM 223 (S2145). At this time, the beat period T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds/(BGM tempo). If the ROM 222 predefines the BGM beat cycle T (milliseconds) instead of the BGM tempo, then in the process of S2145, the BGM beat cycle of the type at which reproduction is to be started is read from the ROM 222. Just put it out.

Also, the timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 (S2146). The timer counter 223h is updated while counting up during the sound editing/output processing executed every 1 millisecond, and by counting up to the beat cycle T of the BGM calculated in the processing of S2145, the MPU 221 , the timer counter 223h can be used to grasp the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM whose reproduction is started is the time-saving BGM (S2147). If it is not the time saving BGM (S2148: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S2149). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 27) causes the ball-entering sound that notifies the ball to enter the first ball opening 64 to beat the time-saving BGM. A start winning sound output process that is reproduced at the timing is executed.

After the process of S2148 or S2149 is finished, the sound editing/output process is finished and the process returns to the main process. Also, as a result of the process of S2143, even if it is determined that it is not the time to change the BGM (S2143: No), the sound editing/output process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the starting winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. 29 and 30 are flow charts showing the starting winning sound output process (S2135). As described above, the starting prize winning sound output process is performed to notify that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM when the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM. This is the process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the code of the time-saving BGM at the pitch.

Referring to FIG. 29, in the starting winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151). The winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not to output the winning sound at the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM in the variable effect, but to play the time saving sound when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is an effect of outputting a ball-entering sound at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, and is one of the advance notice effects suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. Whether or not to execute the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is determined based on the detailed variation pattern determined in the variation display process (see FIG. 26).

A game player normally outputs a ball-entering sound with a pitch matching the code of the time-saving BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, while the winning sound immediate reproduction performance is executed. The ball-entering sound deviates from the rhythm of the BGM for shortening working hours, and is pronounced at a predetermined pitch, thereby recognizing that there is a high degree of expectation for a big win in the variation performance, and increasing interest in the game. be able to.

If the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151: Yes), it is determined whether or not the starting winning prize counter 223d is 0 (S2152). If the starting prize winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152: Yes), there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64, so the starting prize winning sound output processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the starting prize winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2152), it means that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, so an instruction to start reproducing the starting prize winning sound with a predetermined pitch is given. is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2153). As a result, the prize-winning sound of a predetermined pitch is output from the audio output device 226 without waiting for the beat of the BGM or the back beat. Next, 1 is subtracted from the starting winning prize counter 223d (S2154), and the starting winning prize sound output processing is terminated.

As a result of the process of S2151, if it is determined that the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not executed (S2151: No), then, whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T of the BGM for time saving. is determined (S2155). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T (S2155: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM. process for First, it is determined whether or not the value of the starting prize winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156).

If the value of the starting prize winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2156: No), since the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is stocked, a process of generating a ball entering sound is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the chord of the BGM being reproduced changes from the current beat (S2157). The progression of the time saving BGM code is stored in the ROM 222, and the MPU 221 grasps the beat code of the BGM according to the progress of reproduction of the time saving BGM.

Here, the progress of the time-saving BGM code stored in the ROM 222 is associated with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction of the BGM, and the BGM code from the elapsed time is defined. For example, code "D" is associated with an elapsed time of 0 milliseconds, code "G" is associated with an elapsed time of 720 milliseconds, and code "A" is associated with an elapsed time of 1440 milliseconds. "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 2160 milliseconds, and the association ends. When the MPU 221 starts to reproduce the BGM sound, it monitors the elapsed reproduction time. , until the BGM playback start time is from 720 ms to 1440 ms, the BGM code is "G", and the BGM playback start time is from 1440 ms to 2160 ms, until the BGM playback start time is Determine that it is code "A". When the BGM reproduction start time reaches 2160 milliseconds, the BGM code is determined to be "D", the BGM reproduction elapsed time is reset to 0 milliseconds, and the BGM reproduction elapsed time is reset to 0 milliseconds. is monitored, the BGM code at that time is determined. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the progress of chords in BGM in which the same melody is repeatedly reproduced.

If the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157: Yes), the sound output LSI 301 is set to start playing back the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch being the root note of the chord in the sound output LSI 301, and the process proceeds to S2166. The root note of a chord is the basic note in the chord. By the processing of S2159, the sound output device 226 outputs a ball-entering sound whose pitch is the root sound of the chord. When a sound with a pitch other than the root sound of the chord is output at the timing of the beat when the chord of the BGM is changed, the player recognizes the sound as a sound deviated from the chord, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk of On the other hand, by producing a ball-entering sound whose pitch is the root sound, the player can hear the ball-entering sound as a sound that matches the changed chord. Therefore, it is possible to make the player listen to comfortable sounds.

As a result of the process of S2157, if the chord is not changed at the current beat (S2157: No), then it is determined whether or not the transitional tone pronunciation flag 223j is ON (S2160). As a result, if the transitional tone pronunciation flag 223j is off (S2160: No), the chord information on the current beat is read from the ROM 222, and one of the component tones that make up the chord is used as the pitch of the winning tone. is selected (S2161), an instruction to start reproducing the winning sound having the pitch of the selected component sound is set in the sound output LSI (S2162), and the process proceeds to S2166.

As a result, the sound output device 226 outputs a prize-winning sound having a pitch corresponding to the sound constituting the chord. In addition, the ball-entering sound is not only produced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but is also produced with a pitch matching the code of the time-saving BGM. Therefore, a chord is composed of the ball-entering sound and the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a more pleasant sound. In addition, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64, a melody accompanied by BGM for time saving can be composed of the ball entry sound and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing and number of balls entered. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies that are produced by the ball-entering sound from time to time.

As a result of the process of S2160, if it is determined that the transition sound generation flag 223j is ON (S2160: Yes), it means that the pitch of the transition sound was generated at the timing of the immediately preceding back beat. Therefore, at the timing of the beat here, a ball-entering sound is pronounced whose pitch is the constituent sound corresponding to the pronounced passing sound. Specifically, the pitch reproduced on the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2163), and the sound to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced on the previous beat is read from the current BGM code. The pitch is selected from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound (S2164). Then, a reproduction start command for the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2165), and the process proceeds to S2166.

Here, if the chord on the beat of a certain BGM is "C", and the pitch of the constituent note "mi" is pronounced at that time, the pitch "mi" is stored in the pitch information memory. 223k. At the timing of the backbeat of the following BGM, when the pitch of the pitch of the passing sound of the code "C" is to be produced, the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the pitch sound produced on the immediately preceding beat is read out from the pitch information memory 223k ( In this example, "mi"), in the code "C", the pitch of the passing sound corresponding to the constituent note "mi" is specified from the pitch setting table 222c when playing the passing sound. In the present embodiment, "fa" is specified as the pitch of the passing sound, and a ball-entering sound with the pitch of the passing sound "fa" is produced at the timing of the back beat.

Also, when the pitch of the pitch of the chord "C" is played at the timing of the beat of the next BGM following the backbeat (that is, when the transition sound generation flag 223j is ON), From the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the entering sound produced on the immediately preceding beat ("mi" in this example) is read out, and in the code "C", the configuration of the next beat corresponding to the constituent note "mi" is read. The pitch of the sound is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound. In the present embodiment, "So" is specified as the pitch of the component sound in the next beat, and the pitch of the component sound "So" is pronounced at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first beat of the BGM, the following back beat, and the following beat, the incoming ball sounds are produced in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" corresponding to the code "C" of the BGM. Therefore, if an entering tone with a pitch of a passing tone is pronounced on the backbeat between the beats on which the entering tone with the pitch of the chord constituent notes is pronounced, a strange pitch progression will occur. It is possible to suppress the production of a sound or the production of a pitch that deviates from the passing sound produced on the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the ball-hitting sound is produced while inserting the transitional sound.

In the process of S2166, the pitch to be reproduced as the winning sound is stored in the pitch information memory 223k by the processes of S2159, S2162, and S2165 (S2166). Then, since one ball-entering sound corresponding to the ball entering the first ball-entering hole 64 has been produced, the starting prize winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2167). After that, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is set to OFF (S2168), and the start winning sound output process is terminated.

As a result of the process of S2156, if the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156: Yes), since the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not stocked, after turning off the transition sound generation flag 223j ( S2168), the start winning sound output process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter 223h is not the beat cycle T of the BGM as a result of the processing of S2155 (S2156: No), then referring to FIG. is T/2 (S2169). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not T/2 (S2169: No), the starting prize winning sound output process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter 223h is T/2 (S2169: Yes), it is the timing of the backbeat of the BGM being played, so next, the starting prize winning counter 223d is greater than 1 and the beat immediately before. It is determined whether or not the pitch sound is produced (S2170).

If the starting winning prize counter 223d is 1 or less, or if the ball winning sound has not been generated in the previous beat (S2170: No), the starting winning prize sound output processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the starting prize winning counter 223d is greater than 1, and if the sound of winning a ball was produced on the previous beat (S2170: Yes), then the code information of the previous beat and the code information of the next beat are stored in the ROM 222. (S2171), and it is determined whether or not the chord information of the previous beat matches the chord information of the next beat (S2172).

As a result, if the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat match (S2172: Yes), the pitch of the ball-entering sound reproduced in the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2173). , the pitch to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced in the previous beat for the current chord is selected from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed tone (S2174). Then, a reproduction start command for the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2175). As a result, at the timing of the backbeat of the BGM, the winning sound of the pitch selected from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound is output from the audio output device 226. FIG.

Here, the pitch of the ball-entering sound output at the timing of the beat of the BGM is the sound constituting the chord, whereas it is selected from the pitch setting table 222c for playback of the passage sound at the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. A pitch is the passing note of a chord. As a result, when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 continuously, not only the standard sound of the chord, but also the back beat of the BGM is used to generate the ball entry sound while inserting the passage sound of the chord. Therefore, a more complex melody can be played by the sound of entering the ball. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, the pitch of the pitch of the entering sound to be pronounced on the backbeat of the BGM is determined based on the pitch of the entering sound to be produced on the previous beat by the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound. The pitch of the incoming ball sound to be pronounced by the beat is also decided. As a result, if the pitch of the transition sound is pronounced on the backbeat between the beats where the pitch of the pitch of the pitch of the chord constituent sound is pronounced, a strange pitch will be produced. It is possible to suppress the production of a passing tone and the production of a pitch that deviates from the passing tone produced on the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the ball-hitting sound is produced while inserting the transitional sound.

Next, the transitional sound generation flag 223j indicating that the transitional sound has been generated is set to ON (S2176), and since the ball-entering sound corresponding to the ball-entering is produced, the value of the starting winning counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S2179). ), ending the starting winning sound output process.

On the other hand, if the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat do not match as a result of the process of S2172 (S2172: No), the chord information of the current BGM is read from the ROM 222, and the constituent tones forming the chord are read. The pitch of one ball-hitting sound is selected from the above (S2177), and a command to start playing the ball-hitting sound having the pitch of the selected component sound is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2178). If the chord transition sound is output here, the chord will be changed on the next beat, so that the transition sound will be a floating sound, and the player will hear a strange melody. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the chord information of the previous beat and the next beat do not match by the processing of S2177 and S2178, in the back beat of the BGM, the pitch of the pitch of the chord constituent sound is determined. Since the sound is output from the voice output device 226, the player can hear a beautiful melody according to the code.

After the processing of S2178, 1 is subtracted from the value of the starting winning prize counter 223d (S2179), and the starting winning prize sound output processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the timing of generating the winning sound when the starting winning sound output process is executed will be described. First, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the timing of producing the ball-entering sound when the balls enter the first ball-entering hole 64 one by one during one beat of the BGM. As shown in FIG. 31, in this case, the ball that enters the first ball opening 64 during the beat of the BGM is stocked, and the ball entry sound is generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM. At this time, at the timing of the first beat when the chord is changed, the pitch of the pitch of the chord (“C” in the example in FIG. 31) of the chord (“C” in the example in FIG. 31) is pronounced. After that, as long as the chord is not changed, a ball-entering sound having a pitch corresponding to that chord's component sound (in the example of FIG. 31, either "do", "mi" or "so") is produced.

In this way, since the ball-entering sound is produced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can rhythmically play the game to the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, when a ball-entering sound is to be produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound is determined based on the time-saving BGM code at the timing of producing the ball-entering sound. Specifically, one of the pitches of the component sounds that form the chord is selected as the pitch of the ball-entering sound. As a result, the ball-entering sound is not only sounded in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also sounded with a pitch matching the code of the time-saving BGM. Therefore, a chord is composed of the ball-entering sound and the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a more pleasant sound.

Next, FIG. 32(a) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of ball entry sounds when three balls enter the first ball entrance 64 during one beat of the BGM, and FIG. ), two balls enter the first ball entrance 64 during one beat of the BGM, and another ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before the next beat. FIG. 32(c) is a diagram for explaining the timing of the sound of the ball entering the ball when the ball enters the first ball, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the timing of producing a ball-entering sound when two more balls enter the first ball-entering hole 64 before the next back beat.

In the cases of FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), one of the balls 1 to 3 corresponds to one of them at the timing of the next beat after the first ball entering the first ball entrance 64. A ball-entering sound is pronounced with the pitch of the chord constituent sound at the timing of that beat. Next, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the number of balls entering the first ball opening 64 in the stock for which the ball entry sound is not produced is two or more, and the ball entry sound is produced on the immediately preceding beat. On the condition that it was done, the sound of entering the ball is pronounced. In other words, in the examples of FIGS. 32(a) to (c), the pitch sound is produced on the backbeat of the BGM. Then, at the timing of the next beat after the back beat, a ball-entering sound is produced.

Here, as a condition for the sound of entering the ball to be produced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the number of balls entering the first entry hole 64 in the stock for which the sound of entering the ball is not produced is two or more. Moreover, the condition that the ball-entering sound was produced on the previous beat was to make the ball-entering sound be produced consecutively on the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat. be. As a result, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64, not only the timing of the beat, but also the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat are continuously performed. By uttering the ball-entering sound, it is possible to engrave a wider variety of rhythms with the ball-entering sound. In addition, since the ball-entering sound is not produced on the beat and the ball-entering sound is produced on the backbeat, it is possible to suppress the impression that the rhythm of the ball-entering sound is not BGM.

In addition, on two beats, an entry sound with a pitch that is the pitch of the chord component sound is produced, and on the back beat between these two beats, an entry sound with a pitch that is the transition sound of the chord structure sound is produced. pronounced. As a result, while matching the rhythm of the BGM, the ball-entering sounds are produced while inserting the ball-entering sounds having the pitches of the passage sounds between the ball-entering sounds having the pitches of the constituent sounds of the BGM chords. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide variations to the melody of the ball-entering sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody of the ball-entering sound does not become monotonous, and voice output can be performed to keep the player from getting bored.

In the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 27), the details of the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) executed when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed are described in detail below. This is almost the same as the sound output processing (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Specifically, the starting prize winning counter 223d used in the starting prize winning sound output process is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the winning sound is replaced with the operation sound to produce the frame button operation sound output process. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, the operation sound can have the same effect as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output process.

In particular, since the operation sound is produced in time with the beat of the BGM, sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame buttons 22 to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Also, when an operation sound is produced, the pitch of the operation sound is determined based on the BGM code at the production timing. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22, a melody is produced by the operation sound, so that voice output can be performed so as not to bore the player.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 43. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and V interrupt signal that the MPU 231 detects. There is a V-interrupt process that is executed when the The V interrupt signal is a signal that the image controller 237 transmits to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. do.

The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, command determination processing (S2602) is first executed, and then display setting processing (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern is determined according to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command, and the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the The variable display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that the variable pattern command for display, the stop type command for display, and the like will be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode of the variable performance selected by the main controller 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, and display the performance image corresponding to the mode in the third mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2603), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is specified based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602). According to the drawn content, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specifically specified.

Furthermore, depending on the processing situation, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, task processing is executed (S2604). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2603), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is selected. Along with specifying, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the image controller 237 . As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-back off reach, front-back off A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to "ready-to-win" and "completely out" are compared, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

Next, the details of the command determination process (S2602), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. FIG. First, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing. Command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 .

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702). All unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S2704), and if there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S2704: Yes), the command for the number of reserved balls is processed. is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36(a), the details of the pending ball count command process (S2705) will be described. FIG. 36(a) is a flow chart showing the pending ball count command process. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pending ball number command process, first, the new pending ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The new pending ball number command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the display pending ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the pending ball number information included in the pending ball number command for display is acquired (S2802).

In the process of S2802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. This makes it possible to acquire the latest information on the number of pending balls.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the other number of held balls is turned off. (S2803) and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the new pending ball number command flag is ON, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area. Expand the pending image data as displayed in Ds1.

Returning to FIG. 35, in the processing of S2704, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of pending balls for display (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among the unprocessed commands. (S2706), and if there is a confirmation command for display (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will now be described with reference to FIG. 36(b). FIG. 36(b) is a flow chart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the fixed command process (S2707), the fixed command flag is set to ON (S2811), and the process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the fixed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the fixed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . Also, after processing the setting of the display of the variable effect, if the fixed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has passed, the restart effect (the third pattern is shaken up and down effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display setting process is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it appears as if the variable effect was stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM. This sham display defines the variation table display data table for a period of time shorter than the original variation time so that the variation presentation is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the variation display data table to be described later. It is realized by In this embodiment, after that, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. As a result, the player can perceive that the variable performance is stopped along with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while following the rhythm of the BGM.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S2708), if there is a display demo command (S2708: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the demonstration command processing (S2709) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36(c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demonstration command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the demonstration command process (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, the null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear its contents (S2822).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the fixed command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the fixed display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. Incidentally, the demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The fixed display flag is a flag indicating that a fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

By executing this demonstration command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2821 is updated. , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Further, in the display setting process, the timer counter 233e to which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823 is used to measure the time of the demonstration effect specified in the demonstration display data table, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the states of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the display setting control timing counter 233e, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table has ended, the effect to be displayed next , control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

When the execution of the command determination process is started, if both the confirmed command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area, the confirmed command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmed command flag is turned on. This demo command process (S2709) is then executed, and the fixed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

Accordingly, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the fixed display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if the start timing of the variable effect does not come after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. , it is impossible for both the definite command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that command transmission/reception is not performed normally.

In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays the demonstration effects that are not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that the erroneous finalized display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, by starting the demonstration effect without executing the confirmation display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call the hall staff and request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of SS2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation start command among the unprocessed commands. (S2710) If there is a fluctuation start command for display (S2710: Yes), the fluctuation start command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the fluctuation start command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start command process. This fluctuation start command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 . The display fluctuation start command is a command sent to the display control device 114 when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command instructing the start of fluctuation from the main control device 110. . The display control device 114 receives this display variation start command from the sound lamp control device 113 to start the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 .

In the fluctuation start command process, first, a restart display data table corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2826). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear its contents (S2827).

Next, time data corresponding to the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2828), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2829). Then, the fixed command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to OFF, and the fixed display flag is set to OFF (S2830), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Thus, the display control device 114 receives the display variation start command and first displays the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, when the main controller 110 decides to start the variable production, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern to swing up and down immediately after the start of the variable production. As a result, the variation effect by the third symbol is started.

On the other hand, after transmitting the display variation start command, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in synchronization with the beat of the BGM being reproduced. By receiving these display variation pattern commands, the display control device 114 starts execution of variation effects according to the detailed variation patterns indicated by the display variation pattern commands, and starts high-speed variation of the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the variation effect of the third symbol is started at the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the player can perceive that the variable performance is started in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

By setting the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag to OFF by the processing of S2830, when the start of the variable production is determined by main controller 110, instead of the demonstration production being displayed or the fixed display production , the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display a variable effect. Further, when the execution of the command determination process is started, if both the fixed command and the display variation start command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-described fixed command process (S2707) is executed first, and the fixed command flag is set to ON, then this fluctuation start command process (S2711) is executed, and the determination command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2830.

Returning to FIG. 35, in the processing of S2710, if it is determined that there is no display variation start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S2712), if there is a variation pattern command for display (S2712: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2713) will now be described with reference to FIG. 37(b). FIG. 37(b) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, a detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S2831). Next, for the extracted details, the variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is also the risk of being interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. If instructed by the device 110, the determination command (display determination command ) is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233a, the display data table that is actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if a variable effect having a variable time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, the determination command from the main controller 110 is issued. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as part of the variable effect. , the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, the content is cleared by writing Null data into the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, time data representing the time during which the display is controlled by the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 is set in the clock counter 233e (S2834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the determination command flag, demonstration display flag, and determination display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832 , the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233e to which the variable time data is set by the process of S2834 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and the variable effect in the variable display data table is measured. When it is determined that is completed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a finalized display performance when a finalized command (displayed finalized command) from the main control device 110 is received. Further, if the determination command (determination command for display) is not received after the completion of the variable effect, the setting of the display is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, it appears as if the variation effect was stopped and displayed. This is realized by defining the variable display data table for a period of time shorter than the original variable time so that the variable effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat. In this embodiment, after the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop display of an apparent variation effect according to the variation table display data table, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing. to ensure the original fluctuation time. As a result, the player can perceive that the variable performance is stopped along with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while following the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, when both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display variation Since the variation effect associated with the pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since it is first determined whether there is a confirmation command for display, the confirmation command process corresponding to the confirmation command for display is always executed first. A process corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command for is executed later, and as in the process of S2836, the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display determination command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. A process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the process of S2832, the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting. can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, both the display variation start command and the display variation pattern command may be stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands. This is the case where the variation start timing determined by main controller 110 and the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced are aligned. In this case, if the processing corresponding to the display variation start command is given priority, the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command is not performed, and the restart effect associated with the display variation start command is performed until the final display is performed. end up

On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence or absence of the display variation start command is determined first, the demonstration command process, which is the process corresponding to the display variation start command, is always executed first. , the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the processing of S2832, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display variation start command is overwritten to overwrite the variation display data table. can be rewritten to Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display variation start command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

Returning to FIG. 35, in the processing of S2712, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. (S2714), and if there is a stop type command for display (S2714: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the stop type command process (S2715) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process is for executing a process corresponding to the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss, special stop symbol ) is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 34(b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2842).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S2843) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, the process of S2842 is used as the type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the drawing contents corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. Offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by is described. In the above-described task processing (S2604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2843, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined by assuming that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if the stop type is completely out.

Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the stop symbol of the big win even if it is out. , there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered because the player misunderstands that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big win. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if the jackpot is won. Also, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no stop type command for display (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2722), and the process of S2701 is performed. back to

In the process of S2701, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes ), and the processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2701 to S2722 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. ), the command determination process is terminated.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2603), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. First, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S2902 to S2904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2902), S2903, Each process of S2904 executes the process corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball number command flag is ON (S2903), and if the new pending ball number command flag is ON (S2903: Yes) It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

Details of the reserved image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. 41 . FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process. This pending image setting process causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the number of pending balls patterns corresponding to the number of pending balls notified by the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the command for the number of pending balls for display. Therefore, the processing is to expand the image data.

In the pending image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the number of pending balls symbols corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) is developed (S2951). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. Determine the various parameters required.

In the pending image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new pending ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the pending image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new pending ball count command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S2903: No), then , S2905.

In S2905, pointer update processing is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233c that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing contents should be obtained from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. This is the process of performing

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the pointer 233c is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". If the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233c is updated by the process of S2981, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is End information. is determined (S2982). As a result, if it is the End information (S2982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2983). If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984). Time data is set in the clock counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2983, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is decremented by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, , End information is always displayed at the previous address, so that the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the process of S2982, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c after the update by the process of S2981 is not the End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2982: No ), the process of S2983 to S2986 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2987.

In the processing of S2987, it is determined whether or not the fixed command flag is on (S2987). Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2987: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set in 233a (S2988), and the value of the timer counter is set to 1. (S2989) and returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update process (S2905), the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b are displayed with the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process. The drawing content of the address that is stored is expanded (S2906). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S2906 together with the previously developed reserved image, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the presentation. ) should be transmitted, in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is checked whether or not the determination command flag is ON (S2913).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113. A mode of finalized display effect corresponding to the stopped symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, a finalized display data table of that mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, the time data corresponding to the production time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the determination command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and then the determination display flag indicating that the determination display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918). (S2919), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is started from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before, in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table is started. Design offset information from the stop design of the fluctuation performance performed one before is stipulated until a predetermined time elapses after it is performed. In the task processing (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation performance is identified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information defined in the variable display data table to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2913, if the confirmation command flag is not ON but OFF (S2913: No), the process proceeds to S2920 shown in FIG. 40 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is ON (S2920). ). Then, if the fixed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the fixed display effect has ended, so the fixed display flag is set to off. After that (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the performance time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received before the fixed display effect ends, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is satisfied when the confirmation display effect is performed, and in this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b has been cleared by the processing of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, clearing of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S2920, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S2920: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S2926). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting processing ends as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

On the other hand, in the process of S2926, if the demonstration display flag is not ON but OFF (S2926: No), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2929). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation table display data table is defined for a period of time shorter than the original variation time so that the variation display is apparently stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the variation display data table. do. Then, after the apparent stop display, by setting the restart display data table by the processing of S2929, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing, and the original restart effect is displayed. Secure variable time. As a result, the player can perceive that the variable performance is stopped along with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while following the rhythm of the BGM.

In addition, in the display control device 114, even after a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, the confirmation command ( When the confirmation command for display) is not received, the drawing contents can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as described above, the restart effect is a effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the variation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer updating process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new variation pattern command for display is received. Here, the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in such a manner that the third pattern is vibrated (oscillated) about a predetermined position. Only the drawing contents required to be displayed by swinging at least once are specified. By repeatedly developing the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, the restart effect in which the third pattern is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加In this way, the restart effect is a effect of vibrating and displaying the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81, so that the restart display data table is changed so that the third pattern is vibrated at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

In addition, when the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and the display data table buffer A fixed display data table is set in 233a. As a result, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command for display even during the restart effect, and the final symbol display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be displayed.

Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S2832 in FIG. A variable display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, when the display demo command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. A demonstration display data table is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁The restart effect is an effect that is displayed when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 that should have been originally received is not received after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received even while the restart effect is being displayed due to noise, malfunction, or the like. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the game state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2604) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, and filter designation information), a drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3001). That is, in the processing of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2604). Then, the parameter necessary for the sprite determined by task processing is associated with the specified address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, information instructing to develop the drawn image is included in the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as the drawing target buffer information. If the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the drawn image in the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3002, the rendering target buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The draw target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". will be As a result, the drawing object buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 34(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the image is drawn. When the processing and the display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, the second frame buffer is specified as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is displayed. A first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. . Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are specified alternately every 20 milliseconds to the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer, respectively. As a result, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is detected, the player is notified that a ball has entered. A ball-entering sound is output in accordance with the timing of beats and back beats of BGM. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for informing the player of the operation is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat.

As a result, the pitch sound and the operation sound are produced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Also, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is to be produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds and passing sounds of the BGM code (chord) at the production timing. As a result, the ball-entering sound and the operation sound are not only produced in time with the beat of the BGM, but also produced at a pitch that matches the BGM code at that time. Therefore, a melody with BGM as accompaniment can be composed of the ball-entering sound and the operation sound, and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies played by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound from time to time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating up and down from the timing of the original fluctuation start to the timing of the beat of the BGM. (Pattern shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original variation start timing, at that timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started, and The 3-symbol display device 81 starts the high-speed variation of the 3-symbol.

Here, display patterns are set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound that matches the display of the effect image and the lighting and blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are specified in the data table, and these are also specified in time with the beat of the BGM. done.

Furthermore, in the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmation display is performed, the third pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the stopped display is indicated. The audio output device 226 is caused to produce a stop sound representing the current state. After that, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating it up and down (pattern shaking period) until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the third pattern is fixedly displayed at the original fixed display timing.

In this way, the variable effect is originally started and displayed definitely regardless of the beat of the BGM. Stop display. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of the high-speed fluctuation, and from the temporary stop display to the original fixed display timing, the third pattern is vibrated up and down as a symbol shaking period. conduct.

As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in time with the beat of the BGM, and the player can see as if a stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variable effect can also be displayed in time with the beat of the BGM. The action of the 1 role object 87 can also be performed in time with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the game can be played rhythmically and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the timing of changing the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when a big win is made and notifying the big win, and the BGM for the big win effect output at the time of the big win effect. Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the , the BGM continues to be played regardless of the start and stop of the variable production, and the fake start of the variable production (start of high-speed fluctuation) and the fake The case where the stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) is executed at the beat of the BGM has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a case will be described in which the reproduction of BGM is started in accordance with the start of the variable effect, and the reproduction of the BGM is completed in accordance with the end of the variable effect.

In the second embodiment, BGM sound reproduction start information and sound reproduction end information corresponding to the change effect are specified in a data table that is set when a detailed variation pattern is determined. Specifically, the BGM sound reproduction start information is specified at the first address (0001H) of the data table. Also, the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined in the data table in association with the address corresponding to the time at which the variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern ends. Further, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variable effect is performed is also defined.

By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts reproducing the BGM in accordance with the start of the variable performance, ends the reproduction of the BGM in accordance with the end of the variable performance, and also produces a stop sound for the variable performance. It will be done.

Here, in the second embodiment, the variable time is defined so that the variable effect ends at the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the variable effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the stop sound of the variable effect is also produced at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the variable performance will be stopped together with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to rhythmically end the variable presentation, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable display processing (S1913), the sound editing/output processing (S1909), the starting winning sound output processing (S2133), and the frame button operation are executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that part of the ON output process is different. Other configurations and, various processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, other various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and display Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 44, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, as in the first embodiment, after the processes of S2101 to S2104 are executed, the display control device 114 is notified of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A variation pattern command is generated and set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3501). Also, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop pattern acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1902) that is subsequently executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24). be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display generated at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it is temporarily stored in the RAM 223, and instead, a fluctuation start command for display is sent to the display control device 113 to start the restart production, thereby starting the fluctuation production. By transmitting the variation pattern command and the stop type command for display to the display control device 113 and starting the high-speed variation of the variable performance, the variable performance is apparently started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In the embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113, and the variation effect begins to fluctuate rapidly.

After the process of S3502, the same processes of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment are performed, and then a data table corresponding to detailed fluctuation patterns determined by the process of S2104 is set (S3503). Then, the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3504), and the variable display processing ends.

As a result, the MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized by the process of S3504, and transfers the various control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set by the process of S3403 to the data table. Read out from the storage area 222b, and according to the control information, sound output from the audio output device 226, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, operation of the first accessory 87 (first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and first accessory drive of the rotation motor 87e).

Here, various types of control information are read out from the data table during the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 45), as in the first embodiment, at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first role object 87 can be started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM, the player can play the game rhythmically. can enjoy. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be heightened.

In addition, as described above, the BGM sound reproduction start information is specified at the first address (0001H) of the data table, and the BGM sound reproduction end information corresponds to the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. are specified in the data table. Further, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is defined, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variable effect is performed is also defined. By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts reproducing the BGM in accordance with the start of the variable performance, ends the reproduction of the BGM in accordance with the end of the variable performance, and also produces a stop sound for the variable performance. It will be done. Here, in the second embodiment, since the variable time is defined so that the variable performance ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the variable performance ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the variable performance stops. A sound is also produced at the beat timing of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the variable performance will be stopped together with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to rhythmically end the variable presentation, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, sound editing/output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the sound editing/output processing (S1908).

In this sound editing/output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer 223g is 0 (S3511). If the pointer 233g is not 0 (S3511: No), it is determined whether the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above in the description of the first embodiment, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the beat cycle T of the BGM being reproduced. As a result of the process of S2121, if the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T (S2121: Yes), it is determined that the timing of the beat has come in the BGM being reproduced, the process proceeds to S2128, and the pointer 223g 1 is added (S2128), and in the set data table, the control information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition is read (S2129). Thereafter, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, according to the various control information specified in the data table, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting and blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first role object 87 are performed. is controlled.

If it is determined that the pointer 233g is 0 as a result of the processing of S3531 (S3531: Yes), it is immediately after the data table is set by the MPU 221, so the determination processing of S2121 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2128. to process. That is, immediately after the data table is set, BGM playback has not started, so the BGM beat timing cannot be determined by the determination processing in S2121. Therefore, when the pointer 233g is 0, the process proceeds to S2128 as it is, so that the sound output from the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device are performed according to various control information specified at the first address (0001H) of the data table. Lighting/flashing of 227 and operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

Here, the data table is set by the MPU 221, for example, at the timing when the variable effect is started. Therefore, along with the start of the variable effect, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the starting winning sound output process (S2122).

In this start winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3521). If the value of the pointer 223g is not 1 (S3521: No), the process proceeds to S2151, and thereafter, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

As a result, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is detected, a ball entering sound for notifying the player that a ball has entered is synchronized with the timing of the BGM beats and back beats. output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Also, when a ball-entering sound is produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound is determined by using the constituent sounds and passing tones of the BGM code (chord) at the timing of the production. A player can be made to listen to a melody accompanied by BGM by the ball-entering sound pronounced at a matching pitch. Moreover, since the melody differs depending on the timing and the number of hits, the player can be entertained with various melodies played by the sound of the hits.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pointer 223g is 1 by the processing of S3512 (S3512: Yes), the value of the pointer 223g is changed from 0 to 1 by S2128 of the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 45). Since it means that the process is executed immediately after the count-up, that is, the process is executed for the first time after the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined and the data table is newly set accordingly, the starting winning counter 223d is set to 0 (S3521), and the start winning sound output process is terminated. As a result, the number of balls entering the first start hole 64 after the start of the variable effect based on the determined detailed change pattern can be counted by the start winning counter 223d. Therefore, it is possible to cause the sound output device 226 to output the ball-entering sound corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 64 after the variable effect is started.

Note that in the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 45), the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) executed when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed is the same as in the first embodiment. Similarly, the details are almost the same as the starting winning sound output process. That is, the frame button operation sound output process is obtained by replacing the starting winning counter 223d used in the starting winning sound output process with the frame button operation frequency counter 223f and replacing the winning sound with the operation sound. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, the operation sound can have the same effect as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output process.

In particular, since the operation sound is produced in time with the beat of the BGM, sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame buttons 22 to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first and second embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs sounds from the sound output device 226 based on effects determined based on commands from the main control device 110, Determining and controlling the lighting/blinking mode of the lamp display device 227 and the operation mode of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87e) will be described. did.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display control device 114 specifies the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the specified display content is transmitted from the display control device 114 by voice lamp control. The device 113 is notified. The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 according to the display content notified from the display control device 114.

Along with this, in the first and second embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the beat cycle (T) of the BGM, whereas in the third embodiment, the display control The device 114 counts the beat cycle (T) of the BGM, and the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beats and back beats.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. As shown in FIG.

The difference between the RAM 223 in the third embodiment and the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 9) is that a one-beat flag 223l and a back-beat flag 223m are provided instead of the timer counter 223h. . In the third embodiment, since the sound ramp control device 113 does not count the BGM beat cycle (T), the timer counter 223h is not required.

The one-beat flag 223l is a flag indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat. When it is on, it indicates that it is the timing of the BGM beat, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not the timing of the BGM beat. The backbeat flag 223m is a flag indicating the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. When it is on, it indicates the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. indicates no

Both the one-beat flag 223l and the back-beat flag 223m are set to the initial value "off" in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-on process (see FIG. 23). is set. Here, the display control device 114 transmits a beat command indicating the timing of the beat to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of the BGM. A beat command indicating that it is time for a beat is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the MPU 221 receives from the display control device 114 a beat command indicating the beat timing of the BGM, the MPU 221 sets the one beat flag 223l to ON. Further, when a beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM is received from the display control device 114, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON.

The one-beat flag 223l is referenced in the sound editing/output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57). The process of S2133 is executed.

By performing the processing of S2128 to S2133 at the timing of the BGM beat, various control information is read from the data table at the BGM beat timing, and according to the read various control information, at the BGM beat timing, Audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first role object 87 are controlled. For example, through the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the timing of the BGM beat. In addition, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first role item editing drive process (S1910) based on the various control information read here, the lamp The lighting/blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically.

The data table used in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided for each performance determined by the sound lamp control device 113 according to commands from the main control device 110 and the like. On the other hand, one data table used in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is provided for all display contents notified from the display control device 114 .

The one-beat flag 223l is referenced in the starting winning sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process. , the processes of S2156 to S2168 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Further, the backbeat flag 223m is also referred to in the starting prize winning sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process, and when the backbeat flag 223m is on, at the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. Assuming that there is, the processing of S2170 to S2179 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As a result, the pitch sound and the operation sound are produced in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat and back beat, so that sounds with a sense of rhythm are output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Also, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is to be produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds and passing sounds of the BGM code (chord) at the production timing. As a result, the ball-entering sound and the operation sound are not only sounded in time with the BGM beats and back beats, but also sounded with pitches that match the BGM chords at that time. Therefore, a melody with BGM as accompaniment can be composed of the ball-entering sound and the operation sound, and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies played by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound from time to time.

The one beat flag 223l and the back beat flag 223m are used in the sound editing/output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57), including the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing. , these flags are set to OFF after the processing referring to these flags is performed (S4002, S4003 in FIG. 57).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 according to the third embodiment differs from the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment in that the work RAM 233 is provided with a timer counter 233f and the display data table storage area 232a stores The only difference is the content defined in the display data table.

The timer counter 233f is a counter for counting the beat cycle of BGM in the display control device 114 . The MPU 231 uses the timer counter 233f to determine the timing of beats and back beats of the BGM being reproduced. In the display setting process (S2603), the MPU 231 determines whether or not it is time to change the BGM based on the command newly received from the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined that it is time to change the BGM, A BGM reproduction start command including information on the changed BGM type is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to start reproducing new BGM, and the timer counter 233f is set to 1. Initialize (S3611 to S3614 in FIG. 51).

In addition, the program ROM 232 stores the tempos of all BGM to be played back, and the MPU 231 reads out the tempos of the BGM to be played back from the program ROM 232, and calculates the beat period T therefrom ( S3613 in FIG. 51).

After that, the timer counter 233f is incremented by 1 in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds. However, if the value of the timer counter 233f matches the beat cycle T, "1" is set instead of adding one. As a result, the beat cycle of the BGM is counted by the timer counter 233f.

When the value of the timer counter 233f is T, the MPU 231 determines that it is the BGM beat timing, and transmits a beat command indicating the BGM beat timing to the audio lamp control device 113 . The audio ramp control device 113 grasps the beat timing of the BGM by receiving the beat command indicating the beat timing of the BGM. Further, when the value of the timer counter 233f is T/2, the MPU 231 determines that it is the backbeat timing of the BGM, and issues a beat command indicating the backbeat timing of the BGM to the audio ramp control device 113. Send. The audio ramp control device 113 grasps the timing of the backbeat of the BGM by receiving the beat command indicating the timing of the backbeat of the BGM.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first role object 87 (the first role object vertical movement motor 87a and the 1 role product rotation motor 87e drive) is controlled. As a result, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first role object 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113, at the timing of the BGM beat or the backbeat, makes a ball-entering sound that notifies that a ball has entered the first ball-entering hole 64, or operates the frame button 22. Control is performed to produce an operation sound that notifies of the fact. Therefore, since the ball-entering sound and the operation sound are produced at the timing of the beat and backbeat of the BGM, the player can hear the ball-entering sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

Since the display control device 114 updates the value of the timer counter 223f every 20 milliseconds, the BGM beat cycle can only be counted at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the beat cycle of the BGM is a multiple of 20 milliseconds. In other words, the tempo of the BGM is determined by the display control device 114 based on the update interval of the value of the timer counter 223f. For example, when V interrupt processing is executed every 30 milliseconds, the value of the timer counter 223f is also updated every 30 milliseconds. Therefore, the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the beat period of the BGM is a multiple of 30 milliseconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the display data table stored in the display data table storage area 232a of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables.

The display data table in the third embodiment differs from the display data table in the first embodiment in that, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from now on is displayed at some addresses. It is a point that stipulates For example, when displaying a high-speed change in a variable effect, the display content is specified as "high-speed change display", and when displaying a character image of a girl, the display content is specified as "girl character display", and a light emission effect is specified. When an image is to be displayed, the display content shall be defined as "light emission effect display".

Note that the display content is also included in the additional data table. That is, in the additional data table which defines the display of the image to be displayed in addition to the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table, the display contents are defined at some addresses.

The display contents defined in the display data table and the additional data table are used to notify the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . That is, when the display data table or the additional data table specifies the display content at the address indicated by the pointer 223c, the MPU 231 sends a display type command including information indicating the display content to the sound lamp control device 113. to send.

When the display type command is received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command from the audio output device 226, and lights/blinks the lamp display device 227. and control to operate the first accessory 87 . As a result, it is possible to easily output sound from the sound output device 226, light/blink the lamp display device 227, or operate the first accessory 87 in accordance with the display contents.

Here, in the display data table and the additional data table, a new image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, an image is erased, or an image is changed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. It defines the content of drawing and also defines the content of display. Therefore, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first role object 87 are also started in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Then, as described above, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 whose execution has started, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the first role object 87 in time with the beat of the BGM. controls the behavior of Therefore, the display of the image on the third pattern display device 81, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting and blinking of the lamp control device 227, and the operation of the first role object 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. , the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be heightened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the variation pattern command process (S2713), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process.

In the variation pattern command process in the third embodiment, by the process of S2831, after extracting the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, the detailed variation pattern flag corresponding to the extracted detailed variation pattern is turned on set, and set the detailed variation pattern flags corresponding to other detailed variation patterns to OFF (S3601). Here, the detailed variation pattern flag is a flag provided for all detailed variation patterns, and indicates that the variation effect is performed by the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag that is turned on.

Next, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3602). Then, after clearing the content by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833), the restart effect defined by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3602 is executed. Time data representing time is set in the clock counter 233e (S3603). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the determination command flag, demonstration display flag, and determination display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3602 , the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified.

That is, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113, first, the restart effect (the effect in which the third pattern moves up and down) is executed on the third pattern display device. Then, when the timing of the beat of the BGM comes, a variation effect is started according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag set to ON by the processing of S3601, and first, the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, in the display data table for variation, which is a display data table for executing the variation performance according to the detailed variation pattern, the variation performance of the third symbol is apparently stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM. It's showing as if Specifically, this sham display is based on the variation display data table, and the variation table display data table is displayed for a period of time shorter than the original variation time so that the variation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. This is achieved by specifying In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, after that, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. As a result, the player can perceive that the variable effect is stopped along with the rhythm of the BGM.

Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the variable effect is started in time with the beat of the BGM and that the display is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the variable presentation to the rhythm of the BGM.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the display determination process (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the display setting process.

In the display determination process in the third embodiment, if the new command flag is ON and it is determined that the new command has been determined in the previous command determination process (S2901: Yes), after the pending image setting process (S2904) Or, in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new reserved ball number command flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to change the BGM (S3611). . Whether or not it is time to change the BGM is determined based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 . For example, based on the command, it is the timing to start playing back the BGM that is output when the big win is announced and the timing to start or end the playing of the BGM for the big win effect that is output at the time of the big win effect. When it is determined that the BGM is changed, it is determined as the timing for changing the BGM.

If it is determined that it is time to change the BGM (S3611: Yes), a BGM reproduction start command including information on the type of BGM after the change is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S3612). . As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 starts reproducing the BGM of the type included in the BGM reproduction start command, and the audio output device 226 outputs the BGM.

Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which reproduction is started is read out from the program ROM 232, and the beat period T of the BGM is calculated and stored in the work RAM 233 (S3613). Also, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S3614). The MPU 231 updates the timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and counts up to the beat cycle T of the BGM calculated in the process of S3613. The counter 233f can be used to grasp the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced.

If it is determined that the new command flag is off as a result of the process of S2901 (S2901: No), if it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing as a result of the process of S3611 (S3611: No), or S3614 After the processing of S3615, the process proceeds to S3615. In the process of S3615, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the beat cycle T of the BGM being reproduced (S3615). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the beat period T of the BGM being reproduced (S3615: Yes), it means that it is the beat timing of the BGM. Set (S3616).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing when execution of the V interrupt process is started. By receiving this beat command, the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the beat timing of the BGM. Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V-interrupt process is next started, the transmission is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V-interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V-interrupt process is preceded by the command discrimination process, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, so there is a slight lag. Accordingly, beat commands are not generated accurately at intervals of 20 milliseconds. There is a risk that the interval will be shifted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed. can be made.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a detailed variation pattern flag set by the processing of S3601 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50) (S3617). Then, if there is a detailed variation pattern flag setting (S3617: Yes), a detailed variation pattern setting process is executed (S3618).

Details of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. This detailed variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display data table corresponding to a detailed variation pattern in the display data table buffer 233a and executing a variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern.

In this detailed fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern whose detailed fluctuation pattern flag is set to ON is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3631). Next, the content is cleared by writing Null data into the additional data table buffer 233b (S3632).

Next, time data representing the time during which the display is controlled by the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3631 is set in the clock counter 233e (S3633). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3634), and the determination command flag, demo display flag, determination display flag and all detailed variation pattern flags are all set to OFF (S3635). After that, the process returns to the display setting process.

As a result, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S3634, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3631 is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The specified drawing content is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. Therefore, according to the variable display data table set by the process of S3631, the third symbol display device 81 can execute the variable effect based on the detailed variation pattern.

Here, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, instead of immediately executing the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, once , to execute the restart effect. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed, and the execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the high-speed variation of the third symbol.

Further, as described above, in the display data table for variation, which is a display data table for executing a variation presentation according to a detailed variation pattern, the variation presentation of the third symbol appears at the timing of the beat of the BGM. is displayed as if stopped. As a result, the player can perceive that the variable effect is stopped along with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible for the player to see that the variable performance is started in time with the beat of the BGM and that the display is stopped, so that the player can enjoy the variable performance to the rhythm of the BGM. can.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. After executing the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process (S3618), or when it is determined that the detailed fluctuation pattern flag is not set by the process of S3617 (S3617: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S3619). As a result, the timer counter 233f starts counting the BGM beat cycle T again. Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

If the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the BGM beat cycle T as a result of the process of S3615 (S3615: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the BGM beat cycle (T/2). (S3620). If the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the BGM beat period (T/2) (S3620: Yes), it means that the BGM backbeat timing is reached. A beat command to indicate is set (S3621).

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing at which the execution of the V interrupt process is started, like the beat command indicating the timing of the beat. The audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the backbeat of the BGM from the beat command indicating the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the back beat timing of the BGM is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next time is that the beat timing of the BGM. is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started. In other words, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the interval between beats and back beats of the BGM grasped by the audio ramp control device 113. can.

After the process of S3621 or when it is determined by the process of S3620 that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half the BGM beat period (T/2) (S3620: No), the process proceeds to S3622. Then, 1 is added to the value of the timer counter 233f to update the timer counter 233f (S3622). Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

In the process of S2905, the same pointer update process as in the first embodiment is executed (S2905). After that, from the display data table and additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and additional data table buffer 233b, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c are developed (S3623). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S3623 together with the reserved image developed earlier, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S3623, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command is generated to notify the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 and the generated display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 .

Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 outputs the audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command from the audio output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87. done.

Here, as described above, in the display data table and the additional data table, the drawing contents are defined so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or erased at the timing of the beat of the BGM. It defines the display contents. In other words, the display content is defined in association with the address of the beat timing of the BGM, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the beat timing of the BGM.

As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, reproduction of audio matching the display content, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first role object 87 are started at the beat of the BGM. In this way, since the output of the sound according to the display contents and the start of driving the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be heightened.

After the process of S3623, the process proceeds to the same process of S2911 as in the first embodiment, and thereafter, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the main processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the main processing.

The main processing in the third embodiment differs from the main processing in the first embodiment in that display command determination processing (S3701) is executed after command determination processing (S1914). In this display command determination processing (S3701), processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed.

Details of the display command determination process (S3701) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the display command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Commands received from the display control device 114 are temporarily stored in a display control command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 .

In the display command determination process, the first command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is first read from the display control command storage area and analyzed to determine whether a display type command has been received from the display control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S3801). Then, when it is determined that the display type command has been received (S3801: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed from now on in the third pattern display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S3802). Then, the data table corresponding to the display contents is read out from the ROM 222 and set (S3803), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3804), and the display command determination processing ends.

As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 reproduces the sound according to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and outputs it from the sound output device 226 according to the data table set by the process of S3803. In addition, according to the data table, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to light up and blink, and in order to operate the first role product 87, the first role object vertical movement motor 87a and the first role object rotation motor 87e are operated. Control to drive.

Here, the display type command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 at the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced, as described above. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 reproduces the audio corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, lights/blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first role object 87 at the beat timing of the BGM. You can start from

On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S3801 (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the BGM reproduction start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3808). . As a result, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has been received (S3808: Yes), a BGM reproduction start instruction of the type specified by the BGM reproduction start command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S3809). As a result, the designated BGM is started to be reproduced and output from the sound output device 226 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM whose reproduction is started is the BGM for time saving (S3810). If it is not the BGM for use (S3810: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF (S3812). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being played back as the BGM, the processing of S2134 and S2135 of the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 56) produces a ball-entering sound that notifies of a ball entering the first ball-entering port 64. A starting winning sound output process that is reproduced at the timing of the beat of the BGM for shortening working hours is executed. When the process of S3811 or S3812 ends, the display command determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has not been received as a result of the process of S3808 (S3808: No), then it is determined whether or not the beat command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3813). If it is determined that a beat command has been received (S3813: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the beat command indicates the beat timing of the BGM (S3814).

As a result, if the beat command indicates that it is the beat timing of the BGM (S3814: Yes), the one-beat flag 223l is set to ON (S3815), and the display command determination processing ends. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is the beat timing of the BGM based on the turned-on one-beat flag 223l.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3814, if the beat command does not indicate the beat timing of the BGM (S3814: No), the beat command whose reception has been confirmed by the processing of S3813 indicates the back beat timing of the BGM. Since it is a beat command, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON (S3816), and the display command determination processing is terminated. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is the timing of the backbeat of the BGM based on the backbeat flag 223m that has been turned on.

If it is determined that the beat command has not been received as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), then it is determined whether or not any other command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3817). Then, if no other command has been received (S3817: No), the display command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S3817: Yes), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3818), the display command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

With reference to FIG. 55, details of the variable display process (S1913) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this variable display process (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, as in the first embodiment, after the processes of S2101 to S2104 are executed, the display control device 114 is notified of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A variation pattern command is generated and set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3501). Also, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop pattern acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1902) that is subsequently executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24). be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display generated at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it is temporarily stored in the RAM 223, and instead, a fluctuation start command for display is sent to the display control device 113 to start the restart production, thereby starting the fluctuation production. By transmitting the variation pattern command and the stop type command for display to the display control device 113 and starting the high-speed variation of the variable performance, the variable performance is apparently started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In the embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display generated at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113 . Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, first, the restart effect is executed, and at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is displayed. Based on this, a variable performance is executed.

After the process of S3502, the same processes of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment are performed, and the variable display process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the details of the sound editing/output processing (S1908) executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing this sound editing/output processing (S1908).

In the sound editing/output processing in the third embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4001). If the one-shot flag 223l is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2134. The same processing from S2128 to S2133 as in the first embodiment is executed, and then the process proceeds to S2134. That is, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, while sequentially counting up the pointer 223g, the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the set data table is read, and if there is sound reproduction start information, A reproduction start command including sound information for starting reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 , and if there is sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including sound information for stopping reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 .

In other words, various control information is read out from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, and according to the read various control information, at the BGM beat timing, the audio output device 226 outputs audio and the lamp display device 227 is turned on. - Blinking and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, through the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the beat timing of BGM. In addition, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first role item editing drive process (S1910) based on the various control information read here, the lamp The lighting/blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, sound output, lighting/flashing of the lamp, and action of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically.

The processing of S2134 to S2137 and the processing of S2138 to S2141 shown in FIG. 57 are the same processing as in the first embodiment. Then, after the process of S2141 is completed, or as a result of the process of S2140, when it is determined that there is end information for the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), in the third embodiment, The process proceeds to S4002, and the one-beat flag 223l is set to OFF (S4002). Further, the backbeat flag 223m is set to OFF (S4003), and the sound editing/output processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the details of the starting winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 58 and 59 are flow charts showing the starting winning sound output process (S2135).

The starting winning sound output process in the third embodiment is different from the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment except for the determination of whether or not it is the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM being played. This is the same as the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment. Specifically, the process of S4101 is executed instead of the process of S2155 in the first embodiment, and it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is ON, thereby determining whether or not it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. It judges (S4101). Then, if the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4101: Yes), it means that it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, so the same processing of S215 to S2168 as in the first embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4101, when the one-beat flag 223l is off (S4101: No), the process of S4102 shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the process of S2169 of the first embodiment. That is, by determining whether or not the backbeat flag 223m is ON, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the backbeat of the BGM being reproduced (S4102).

Then, if the backbeat flag 223m is on (S4102: Yes), it is the timing of the backbeat of the BGM being reproduced, so the same processing of S2170 to S2179 as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if the back beat flag 223m is off as a result of the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the starting prize winning sound output process is terminated.

In addition, in the starting prize winning sound output process in the third embodiment, the processes of S2151 to S2154 are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same effect as the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment by executing the starting winning sound output process in the third embodiment.

Further, the details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) in the third embodiment are almost the same as the starting winning sound output process in the third embodiment, and specifically, it is used in the starting winning sound output process. Frame button operation sound output processing is obtained by replacing the start winning counter 223d with the frame button operation frequency counter 223f and replacing the winning sound with the operation sound. Therefore, by executing the frame button operation sound output processing in the third embodiment, the MPU 221 can achieve the same effect as the frame button operation sound output processing in the first embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display control device 114 counts the beat cycle of the BGM being reproduced, detects the timing of the BGM beat and backbeat, The controller 113 is notified. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 controls such that the audio is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is lit and blinked, and the first role object 87 is operated at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. Thereby, there exists the same effect as 1st Embodiment.

That is, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is detected, a ball entering sound for informing the player of the ball entering is generated in accordance with the timing of the BGM beats and back beats. Output. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for informing the player of the operation is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beats and back beats.

As a result, the pitch sound and the operation sound are produced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

Also, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is to be produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds and passing sounds of the BGM code (chord) at the production timing. As a result, the ball-entering sound and the operation sound are not only produced in time with the beat of the BGM, but also produced at a pitch that matches the BGM code at that time. Therefore, a melody with BGM as accompaniment can be composed of the ball-entering sound and the operation sound, and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies played by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound from time to time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating up and down from the timing of the original fluctuation start to the timing of the beat of the BGM. (Pattern shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original variation start timing, at that timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started, and The 3-symbol display device 81 starts the high-speed variation of the 3-symbol.

Here, the display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound that matches the display of the effect image and the lighting and blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are specified in the data table. done.

Furthermore, in the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmation display is performed, the third pattern is once stopped and displayed, and the stopped display is indicated. The audio output device 226 is caused to produce a stop sound representing the current state. After that, the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern by vibrating it up and down (pattern shaking period) until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the third pattern is fixedly displayed at the original fixed display timing.

In this way, the variable effect is originally started and displayed definitely regardless of the beat of the BGM. Stop display. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of the high-speed fluctuation, and from the temporary stop display to the original fixed display timing, the third pattern is vibrated up and down as a symbol shaking period. conduct.

As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in time with the beat of the BGM, and the player can see as if a stop display was performed. Various effects images displayed during the variable effects can also be displayed in time with the beat of the BGM. The action of the 1 role object 87 can also be performed in time with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the game can be played rhythmically and the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, as in the first embodiment, the change timing of the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when a big win is made and notifying the big win, and the big win effect Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the BGM for the jackpot effect that is output at times, the BGM continues to be played regardless of the start and stop of the variable effect, and the fake start of the variable effect (high-speed A case has been described in which the start of fluctuation) and the simulated stop display (pause of the third symbol) are executed at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, reproduction of the BGM is started in accordance with the start of the variable performance, and the reproduction of the BGM is completed in accordance with the end of the variable performance, as in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 specifies the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and transmits the specified display content from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device. 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs the display content notified from the display control device 114 and, accordingly, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting and blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first role It is common to the third embodiment in that the movement of the object 87 is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 counts the beat cycle (T) of the BGM, and the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beats and back beats. Common with morphology.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed in the display control device 114 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the display setting process (S2603).

In the display setting process of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3611 to S14 and the processes of S3615 to S3622 that were executed in the display setting process of the third embodiment are not executed. Also, after the pointer update process (S2905) is executed, the processes of S4201 to S4210 are executed instead of the process of S3624. Other processes in the fourth embodiment are the same as the display setting process in the third embodiment.

First, in the process of S4201, the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process (S2905) is drawn from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Expand the contents (S4201). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S3623 together with the reserved image developed earlier, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S4201, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command is generated to notify the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 and the generated display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 .

Thereby, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 outputs the audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command from the audio output device 226, lights/blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87. done.

Here, when the variable display data table is set, the first address (0001H) defines high-speed variable display as the display content. , a display type command indicating high-speed variation display of a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table is transmitted. When receiving the display type command, the audio lamp control device 113 starts reproducing BGM corresponding to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display type command. That is, reproduction of BGM is started in accordance with the start of the variable effect.

Further, in the variable display data table, stop display is defined as the display content at the last address corresponding to the end time of the variable effect. Send the display type command shown. When receiving the display type command, the audio lamp control device 113 emits a stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variable effect has been performed, and stops the reproduction of the BGM.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the variable time is defined so that the variable effect ends at the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the variable effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the stop sound of the variable effect is also produced at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the variable performance will be stopped together with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to rhythmically end the variable presentation, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define drawing contents such that images are newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of the BGM. It also stipulates the display contents. In other words, the display content is defined in association with the address of the beat timing of the BGM, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the beat timing of the BGM.

As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the audio matching the display content, the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first role object 87 are started at the beat of the BGM. In this way, since the output of the sound according to the displayed contents and the start of driving the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be heightened.

After the processing of S4201, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the BGM (S4202). The timing of changing the BGM includes, for example, the start timing of the above-described variable effect, the timing of starting the display indicating that the big win has been achieved, the timing of starting the big win effect, and the start of the display indicating the end of the big win effect. There is timing. These timings are determined based on the display contents defined in the set display data table and additional data table.

As a result of the process of S4202, when it is determined that it is time to change the BGM (S4202: Yes), the tempo of the type of BGM at which reproduction is started is read from the program ROM 232, and the beat period T of the BGM is calculated. , is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4203). Also, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S4204). The MPU 231 updates the timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and counts up to the beat cycle T of the BGM calculated in the process of S4203. The counter 233f can be used to grasp the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced.

After the process of S4204 or as a result of the process of S4202, if it is determined that it is not the GM change timing (S4202: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the beat cycle T of the BGM being reproduced. (S4205). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S4205: Yes), it means that it is the timing of the beat of the BGM. Set (S4206).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing when execution of the V interrupt process is started. By receiving this beat command, the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the beat timing of the BGM. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 produces a ball-entering sound for notifying that the ball has entered the first ball-entering sound 64, an operation sound for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, and the like, at the timing of the beat of the BGM. can be pronounced.

Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V-interrupt process is next started, the transmission is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V-interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V-interrupt process is preceded by the command discrimination process, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, with a slight lag. Accordingly, beat commands are not generated accurately at intervals of 20 milliseconds. There is a risk that the interval will be shifted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed, so that the BGM beat interval ascertained by the audio ramp control device 113 can be accurately maintained. can be made.

Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S4607). As a result, the timer counter 233f starts counting the BGM beat cycle T again. Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

If the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the beat cycle T of the BGM as a result of the process of S4205 (S4205: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the beat cycle of the BGM (T/2). (S4208). If the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the BGM beat period (T/2) (S4208: Yes), it means that the BGM back beat timing is reached. A beat command to indicate is set (S4209). Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can produce the ball-entering sound, the operation sound, and the like using not only the beat timing of the BGM but also the backbeat timing.

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started, like the beat command indicating the timing of the beat. The audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the backbeat of the BGM from the beat command indicating the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the back beat timing of the BGM is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next time is that the beat timing of the BGM. is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V-interrupt process is started. In other words, by permitting the transmission of beat commands at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V-interrupt processing is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the intervals between BGM beats and back beats grasped by the audio ramp control device 113. can.

After the process of S4209 or when it is determined by the process of S4208 that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half the BGM beat period (T/2) (S4208: No), then the timer counter 1 is added to the value of 233f to update the timer counter 233f (S4210). Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

As described above, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a ball entering the first ball hole 64 (start winning) is detected while the time saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM, there is a ball entering. A ball-entering sound for informing the player of the event can be output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. In addition, while the performance requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, an operation sound for notifying the player of the operation of the frame button 22 is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beats and back beats. can do. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is produced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds and passing sounds of the BGM code (chord) at the timing of producing the ball-entering sound or the operation sound. A player can be made to listen to a melody accompaniment to BGM by a ball-entering sound or an operation sound produced at a pitch matching the BGM code of the time. Moreover, the melody varies depending on the timing of the ball entering, the number of balls entering, or the timing and the number of times the frame button 22 is operated. A melody can entertain a player.

In particular, since the operation sound is produced in time with the beat of the BGM, sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame buttons 22 to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments, and can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment. .

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. In the first to fourth embodiments, after a ball-entering sound or an operation sound having a pitch corresponding to a chord component sound is produced on a beat of a certain BGM, a passing sound of the same chord is produced at the timing of the back beat of the following BGM. When a high-pitched ball entry sound or operation sound is pronounced, and then, at the timing of the next BGM beat, a ball entry sound or operation sound whose pitch is the same chord constituent sound is pronounced, the progress on the back beat Regarding the case where the pitches of the sound and the constituent sounds on the next beat are defined in association with the pitches of the constituent sounds on the first beat by the pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) during playback of the elapsed sound explained.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the pitches of the passing sound on the back beat and the pitches of the constituent sounds on the next beat in such a case are set to the key of the BGM being played (the main tone of the entire BGM) and the pitch of the current pitch. It is calculated by calculation from the BGM chord and the pitch of the first beat.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted. Needless to say, the invention realized in the fifth embodiment in place of the first embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko machines 10 of the second to fourth embodiments.

61 and 62 describe the details of the starting winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the starting winning sound output process (S2122).

The starting winning sound output process in the fifth embodiment differs from the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment in that when the passing sound is output as the winning sound at the timing of the back beat of the BGM (S2172: Yes) , the process of S4402 (see FIG. 62) is executed instead of the process of S2174 (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and when the winning sound is output at the timing of the beat of the BGM, The difference is that if the passing tone is sounded (S2160: Yes), the process of S4401 (see FIG. 61) is executed instead of the process of S2164 (see FIG. 29). Other processes (S2151-S2163, S2165-S2173, S2175-2179) executed in the starting winning sound output process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the process of S4402 (FIG. 62), the pitch of the winning sound reproduced on the previous beat read from the pitch information memory 223k by the process of S2173 executed immediately before, the key of the BGM being reproduced, Based on the chord of the current BGM, the pitch of the prize-winning sound whose pitch is the pitch of the passage sound of the chord is calculated (S4402).

For example, in the key of the BGM being played (eg, C Major), the tonic of the key ("C" in this example) matches the current chord ("C" in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note played by is the same as the root note of the current chord (perfect 1st) (in the above example, "Do"), the pitch of the winning note played on the back beat (passing note) is , the pitch that is a major second higher than the root note of the chord (“re” in the above example) is calculated.

In the key of the BGM being played (e.g., C Major), the tonic of the key ("C" in this example) matches the current chord ("C" in this example), and playback is on the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note is a major third higher than the root note of the current chord ("mi" in the example above), the pitch of the winning note played on the back beat (passing note) will be the root of the chord. A pitch of a perfect fourth ("fa" in the above example) is calculated from the sound.

In the key of the background music being played (e.g., C Major), the current chord is a major fourth higher ("F" in this example) relative to the tonic of the key ("C" in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note played by is the same as the root note of the current chord (perfect 1st) (in the above example, "fa"), the pitch of the winning note played on the back beat (passing note) is , the pitch that is a major second higher than the root note of the chord (“G” in the above example) is calculated.

Also, in the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is a major fourth higher ("F" in this example) than the tonic of the key ("C" in this example), and If the pitch of the winning note played on the second beat is a major third higher than the root note of the current chord ("La" in the above example), the pitch of the winning note played on the back beat (passing note) is , the pitch that is a fourth higher than the root note of the chord ("B" in the above example) is calculated.

The processing of S4401 (FIG. 61) is similar to the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62). Then, from the key of the BGM being reproduced and the chord of the current BGM, the pitch of the winning tone whose pitch is the chord transition tone is calculated (S4401).

For example, in the key of the BGM being played (eg, C Major), the tonic of the key ("C" in this example) matches the current chord ("C" in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note played by is the same as the root note of the current chord (perfect 1st) ("Do" in the example above), the pitch of the winning note played on the current beat (constituent note) , the pitch that is a major third higher than the root note of the chord (“mi” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, the winning note whose pitch is the root note of the current chord is played on the previous beat, and the winning note whose pitch is a major second higher than the root note of the current chord is played on the immediately preceding beat. , a winning tone with a pitch higher than the root note of the current chord on the current beat is pronounced (in the above example, the winning tones are pronounced in the order of ``do'', ``re'', and ``mi'').

In the key of the BGM being played (e.g., C Major), the tonic of the key ("C" in this example) matches the current chord ("C" in this example), and playback is on the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note is a major third higher than the root note of the current chord ("mi" in the example above), the pitch of the winning note played on the current beat (constituent note) will be the pitch of the chord. A pitch of a perfect fifth (“G” in the above example) is calculated from the root note. In other words, in this case, on the previous beat, a winning tone a major third higher than the root of the current chord is played, and on the immediately preceding beat, a winning tone a perfect fourth higher than the root of the current chord is played. On the current beat, the winning note is pronounced a perfect fifth higher than the root note of the current chord (in the example above, the winning notes are pronounced in the order of ``mi'', ``fa'', and ``sol''). ).

In the key of the background music being played (e.g., C Major), the current chord is a major fourth higher ("F" in this example) relative to the tonic of the key ("C" in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning note played by is the same as the root note of the current chord (perfect 1st) (in the above example, "fa"), the pitch of the winning note pronounced on the current beat (constituent note) , the pitch that is a major third higher than the root note of the chord ("la" in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a prize-winning note whose pitch is the root note of the current chord is pronounced on the previous beat, and a prize-winning note whose pitch is a major second higher than the root note of the current chord is pronounced on the immediately preceding beat, On the current beat, winning tones with a pitch higher than the root of the current chord by a major third are pronounced (in the above example, winning tones are pronounced in the order of ``fa'', ``so'', and ``la'').

Also, in the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is a major fourth higher (“F” in this example) than the tonic of the key (“C” in this example), and If the pitch of the prize-winning note played on the current beat is higher than the root note of the current chord ("La" in the example above), the pitch of the prize-winning note played on the current beat (constituent note) , the pitch that is a perfect fifth higher than the root note of the chord ("do" in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, the winning note with a pitch higher than the root note of the current chord on the previous beat is played on the previous beat, and the pitch of the winning note on the previous beat is raised from the root note of the current chord by an increased fourth. On the current beat, the winning note is pronounced a perfect fifth higher than the root note of the current chord (in the example above, the winning notes are pronounced in the order of "la", "shi", and "do"). ).

In this way, the pitch of the prize-winning sound reproduced on the previous beat, the key of the BGM being reproduced, and the chord of the current BGM are used to calculate the pitch of the prize-winning sound whose pitch is the pitch of the chord transition. What can be calculated is that the scale, which is determined according to the key set for the BGM, only changes the pitch of the tonic according to the key, and the pitch of each sound that makes up the scale. height relationship) is always constant.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, after producing a ball-entering sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the pitch of the sound constituting the chord on the beat of a certain BGM, the same chord is produced at the timing of the back beat of the following BGM. In the case of producing a ball-entering sound or operation sound with a pitch equal to the pitch of the passing sound of BGM, and then producing a ball-entering sound or operation sound with a pitch of the constituent sounds of the same chord at the timing of the beat of the next BGM, The pitches of the passing sound on the back beat and the pitches of the constituent sounds on the next beat are calculated from the key of the BGM being reproduced, the chord of the current BGM, and the pitch of the first beat. It is possible to eliminate the need for the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, for each chord that can be taken in the BGM, the pitch of the constituent sound on the first beat, the pitch of the constituent sound on the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound on the next beat. is not required to be stored in association with the program ROM 222, an increase in the required storage capacity of the program ROM 222 can be suppressed.

Also in the fifth embodiment, frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) is executed when an effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 27). is almost the same as the starting winning sound output process (see FIGS. 61 and 62). Specifically, the starting prize winning counter 223d used in the starting prize winning sound output process is replaced with the frame button operation frequency counter 223f, and the winning sound is replaced with the operation sound to produce the frame button operation sound output process. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, the operation sound can have the same effects as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output process. In other words, it is necessary to associate and store the pitches of the constituent tones on the first beat with the pitches of the transitional tone on the back beat and the pitches of the constituent tones on the next beat for each chord that can be taken in the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222 .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments, and can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment. .

In addition, the "third pattern" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims and each game machine below, and the "variable display" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the corresponds to the range of and "dynamic display of identification information" described in each gaming machine below.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Also, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball enters the first starting port 64 while the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, the winning is stocked, and the winning sound for notifying the winning is played. Although the case where the sound is produced at the timing of the BGM for shortening working hours and the back beat has been described, the pronunciation of the winning sound at the timing of the BGM for shortening the working hours and the back beat is not necessarily limited to the time when the BGM for shortening the working hours is played. Instead, the winning tone may be pronounced for any BGM at the timing of the beat or backbeat of the BGM. As a result, the prize-winning sound is produced in time with the beat of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings toward the game can be heightened. Therefore, interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when the ball wins the special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a while the jackpot effect is being performed, the prize winning is stocked, and the winning sound for notifying the winning is played as BGM for the jackpot effect. It can be pronounced on the beat or back beat. As a result, the joy of receiving many prize balls by the balls entering the special prize opening 65a during the period of the jackpot performance is further heightened by the prize winning sound pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, thereby stimulating the player. can be more satisfying. In addition, by changing the pitch of the winning sound by the method described in each of the above embodiments, a melody in accordance with the chord progression of the BGM for the big win effect can be played by the winning sound. Therefore, this melody can enhance the player's sense of satisfaction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64 or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the stocked input is performed at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The number of balls or the number of operations is 2 or more, the sound of entering the ball or the operation sound is produced at the timing of the previous beat, and the BGM code at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after. On the condition that the code of the BGM in the above is matched, the case where the ball-entering sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the passing sound of the code is generated has been described. Then, an entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the chord transition sound pronounced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM is inputted with the pitch of the chord constituent sounds pronounced at the timing of the beat of the immediately preceding BGM. By inserting the ball sound or operation sound and the ball entry sound or operation sound whose pitch is the chord component sound pronounced at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after, the melody played by the ball entry sound or operation sound can be created. A case has been described in which the player is given the impression that the BGM is in line with the code. On the other hand, when the ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64 or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the number of balls stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM Or, if the number of operations is 2 or more, and there is a ball-entering sound or operation sound at the timing of the previous beat, the BGM code at the timing of the backbeat of that BGM and the BGM at the timing of the BGM immediately after that are played. Regardless of whether or not the BGM matches the chord of the BGM, a ball-entering sound or an operation sound having a pitch of the passing sound may be produced at the timing of the backbeat of the BGM. In this case, the pitch of the entering ball sound or the operation sound that is pronounced at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after is selected from the constituent sounds of the chord of the BGM at that timing. If you select the pitch along the scale set according to the key of the BGM based on the pitch at the timing of the backbeat (the passage of the chord at that time) good. As a result, even if the passage sound of the chord at that time is selected as the pitch of the ball entry sound or the operation sound, and the chord is changed at the timing of the immediately following beat, the melody that follows the chord progression of the BGM without any sense of incongruity is produced. , ball-in sound or operation sound.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball is continuously entered into the first ball entrance 64 or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, not only the beat timing of the BGM but also the BGM A case has been described in which the timing of the back beat is also used to generate the ball-entering sound or the operation sound. On the other hand, the ball-entering sound and the operation sound may be generated not only at the beat and the backbeat of the BGM, but also at the timing of 1/4 of the beat of the BGM. As a result, a more complex rhythm can be created by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound, so that the player can be more entertained by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound.

In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, the case where the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is prepared for the pronunciation of the winning sound when the time-saving BGM is being reproduced has been described. That is, as a notice effect suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high, in the variable effect, the winning sound is not output at the timing of the beat or the backbeat of the time-saving BGM, but is input to the first ball entrance 64. A description has been given of the case of preparing an effect of outputting a ball-entering sound at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM when a ball is hit. As an advance notice effect suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high, a succession of winning sound delays may be prepared in addition to the winning sound immediate reproduction effect or instead of the winning sound immediate reproduction effect. That is, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the timing of the beat or the backbeat of the time-saving BGM is slightly shifted, for example, by 1/10 of the beat cycle, and the ball-entering sound is produced. You may prepare a performance to do so. If the ball-entering sound is pronounced after the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the player may shift to a special game state of a big win. You can have a strong sense of expectation.

Further, for each of the above-described embodiments, an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound lag effect may be prepared for the operation sound. That is, when the operation button 22 is operated while an effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation button 22 is operated instead of producing an operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. An effect may be provided in which an operation sound is immediately produced when the operation is performed. Alternatively, when the operation button 22 is operated while an effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation sound is slightly shifted from the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, for example, 1/1 of the beat cycle. An effect may be provided in which an operation sound is produced by shifting by 10. Although the player who operates the frame button 22 thought that the operation sound would be sounded at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, the operation sound was immediately sounded when the frame button 22 was operated. Also, the operation sound is generated at a time different from the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, so that the user can strongly feel the expectation that the game will transition to a special game state of a big win. 22 can be performed while having more fun.

In addition, the above-mentioned winning sound immediate reproduction effect, the effect of shifting the winning sound from the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM for time saving, or the above operation sound immediate reproduction effect and operation sound lag effect can be changed in multiple variations. It may be executed as one aspect of a so-called continuous advance notice effect that is continuously executed across the effect. For example, when the first winning random number counter C1 acquired with a certain start winning as a trigger indicates a big win, the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is applied to all the suspended variable effects at that time. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the winning sound is pronounced with a delay from the timing of the beat or backbeat of the BGM for shortening working hours, or an immediate reproduction effect of the operation sound or a delay effect of the operation sound may be executed. As a result, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the frame button 22 is operated across a plurality of variable effects, the timing of the beat or the backbeat of the time-saving BGM is not waited. In addition, it is possible to output the winning sound or operation sound at a predetermined pitch, or to make the winning sound or operation sound shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM. The player can be made to hear more sounds and operation sounds, and the player can be made aware of the great variety of games.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning sounds and operation sounds produced at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat are stored, and when a big win occurs, the stored prize winning sounds and operation sounds are reproduced during the big win production. You may make it As a result, the player's sense of superiority over the big win can be heightened while listening to the melody of the reproduced winning sound and operation sound. In addition, when the player operates the frame button 22 after the game ends, the QR code (registered trademark) including the information of the stored winning sound and the operation sound is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the player can The QR code may be photographed with a camera-equipped mobile phone and registered in a predetermined server. Then, when a player plays a game with a pachinko machine of the same model, by inputting a password obtained from the predetermined server into the pachinko machine, a winning sound and an operation sound registered in the server are generated as a jackpot. You may enable it to be played when Thus, by listening to the melody of the winning sound and the operation sound reproduced in the past, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority with respect to the big win. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the winning sound and the operation sound are produced at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, the pitch of the winning prize sound and the operation sound to be produced is determined in accordance with the BGM code, or The function of determining the pitch of the prize-winning sound and the operation sound also using the code passage sound may be executed only when the password obtained from the predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine. . As a result, it is possible to provide such a function only to a specific player, so that the interest of the player can be heightened by providing a special performance.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display pending ball number command to the display control device 114 without delay when the value of the pending ball counter 223a is updated has been described. In the sound lamp control device 113, the updated value of the pending ball counter 223a is stocked, and the updated value of the pending ball counter 223a is displayed and controlled at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. A command for the number of reserved balls for display for notifying the device 114 may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the updated reserved ball number is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 at the timing of the beat or backbeat of the BGM. In other words, the addition and disappearance of the reserved ball number symbols are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically.

In addition, when the ball-entering sound is pronounced at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM, at least while the ball-entering sound is produced at such timing, at the timing at which the ball-entering sound is produced, A display reserved ball number command indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 223 a may be transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the updated reserved ball number is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 together with the sound of the incoming ball sound, so that the player can enjoy a more rhythmical game. can be done.

In addition, in the third and fourth embodiments, when the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the sound lamp control device 113, it is indicated by the display reserved ball number command without delay. A case has been described in which the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81, but the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, after waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced managed by the display control device 114, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number indicated by the display reserved ball number command is displayed as the third pattern. It may be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the display device 81. FIG. As a result, the addition/disappearance of the reserved ball number symbols is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically.

In the above-described second and fourth embodiments, the case where the fluctuation time of the variable effect is set in accordance with the beat cycle of the BGM and the variable effect is terminated at the beat of the BGM has been described. On the other hand, the variation time of the variation performance is set regardless of the beat cycle of the BGM, and the variation performance is apparently stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately before the end of the variation performance. After that, the third symbol may be vertically swung until the original stop display timing is reached. As a result, the player can be shown that the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the player is given the impression that the variable performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. In this case, the stop sound of the third pattern is also generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately before the end of the variable performance, when the variable performance is apparently stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. good too. Thereby, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player that the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

In the first and third embodiments, the case where the BGM is started to be reproduced from the beginning when it is time to change the BGM has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a reach occurs and the BGM for the reach is played, the BGM for the time saving is muted and continues to be played in a silent state, and after the reach is finished, the BGM for the time saving is stopped together with the BGM for the reach. The output of the time-saving BGM may be resumed by canceling the mute. In this case, the time saving BGM continues to be reproduced while the reach BGM is being played, so the timer counter 223h that counts the beat timing of the BGM also counts while the time saving BGM is muted. need to keep doing it. As a result, even if the BGM for reach is reproduced while the BGM for time saving is being reproduced, the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM for time saving can be accurately determined. In addition, reach occurs during playback of the BGM for time saving, and when the BGM for the reach is played, the playback of the BGM for time saving is paused, and after the end of the reach, the playback of the BGM for the reach is stopped. , the temporary stop of the time-saving BGM may be canceled and the reproduction may be restarted from the point where the temporary stop was made. In this case, the timer counter 223h, which counts the beat timing of the BGM, needs to be held even while the time-saving BGM is paused. As a result, even if the BGM for reach is reproduced while the BGM for time saving is being reproduced, the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM for time saving can be accurately determined.

In the above-described first and third embodiments, when the reproduction of the BGM is started after the end of the big win, the reproduction of the BGM may be started together with the start of the variable effect. In this case, the variable time of the variable performance and the time during which the variable performance provided between each variable performance when the variable performance is performed continuously are set to be a multiple of the beat cycle of the BGM. can be set to As a result, the variable performance is started and ended at the beat of the BGM until at least the number of suspension times of the variable performance becomes 0, so that the player can be provided with a rhythmic game matching the rhythm of the BGM.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 313 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, one first ball entrance is provided with a blade member that expands and contracts (or opens and closes), and the blade member is in an expanded state (or opened). state), the ball can easily enter the ball, and when the blade member is in the contracted state (or the closed state), the ball cannot enter the ball easily (or cannot enter the ball). . At this time, when the game state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state at one first ball entrance, the blade member may be configured to be in the expanded state more easily than when the ventilation state is in the normal state. On the other hand, the other first ball entrance may have no blade member and may be in a state where the ball can easily enter. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery conducted with the ball entering one of the first ball entrances results in a big win, the jackpot lottery conducted with the ball entering the other first ball entrance will result in a big win. It may be configured to make it easier for the player to select a type of jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. When the pachinko machine has these configurations, when the game state is the normal state, the ball is entered into the other first ball entrance, and the ball is given to the player so that the lottery for big wins is more likely to occur. When the game state is the variable probability state or the normal state, the ball is entered into one of the first ball entrances where the blade member tends to be in the expanded state, so that the player can obtain a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player. A player can be allowed to shoot balls. Therefore, since it is possible to provide variation in the way the player plays the game, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the suspended variable effect corresponding to the ball entering one of the first ball entrances is the same as the ball entering the other first ball entrances. It may be executed with priority over the variable effect held in response to. In particular, when a jackpot lottery performed with a ball entering one of the first ball entrances results in a jackpot, the type of jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot) is more likely to be selected. When configured, the variable performance held in response to the entry of the ball into the one first ball entrance is preferentially executed, thereby making the player win an advantageous type of jackpot. It can be made easier to grant. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when a ball is entered into all of the first ball entrances, the ball entry sound may be produced. At this time, regardless of which first ball entrance the ball is entered, if there is a ball entry, a ball entry sound may be produced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat for each ball entry. Since the ball-entering sound is sounded at the timing of many beats or back beats of the BGM, the player can hear the melody without delay. On the other hand, the timing of generating the ball-entering sound when a ball is entered may be controlled for each first ball-entering hole. In other words, in this case, if the balls enter the plurality of first ball entrances at approximately the same time, the ball entry sounds for the respective first ball entrances are produced at the same beat or backbeat timing of the BGM. Then, at this time, the pitches of the pitches of the ball-hitting sounds may be determined so as to produce chords that match the BGM code at that time. As a result, the player can experience the sound of the music, so that a more enjoyable game can be provided.

Further, when a plurality of first ball-entering holes are provided, a ball-entering sound may be generated only when a ball enters one of the first ball-entering holes. For example, if this one first ball entrance is configured to make it easier for the player to select a type of jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), each time a ball entry sound is produced In addition, the player can easily know that the ball has entered one of the first ball entrances where the player is likely to select a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. . In addition, the ball-entering sound is produced at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, so that the expectation of the player can be heightened according to the ball-entering sound produced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, and the player can play the game rhythmically. can enjoy In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball-entering sound is produced when the game state is in the time-saving state, and the state where one first ball-entering hole is easier to enter in the time-saving state than in the normal state. If so, the player, when in the time-saving state, is in a state of strongly wanting to know whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entrance. Under such circumstances, while the time-saving BGM is being played back, the player can play the ball-entering sound only when the ball enters the first ball-entering hole. The fact that the ball has entered the first ball entrance can be known by the ball entry sound that is produced in accordance with the rhythm of the time-saving BGM at the pitch that matches the code of the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the player can heighten his expectations for the game while matching the rhythm of the BGM. Also, in this case, if the suspended variable effect corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance is preferentially executed, the ball entering the first ball entrance Since the corresponding variable performance is rapidly digested, it is rare that the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number of reserved balls and the ball that has entered one of the first ball entrances is not held and becomes invalid. In this embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it is assumed that there is a ball entering, and a ball entering sound is produced. A ball entry sound is not pronounced for the ball entry. On the other hand, by generating a ball-entering sound for the ball entering the first ball entrance for which the variable performance is preferentially executed, the suspended variable performance continues to be digested, so that a new performance is generated. The ball entering the first ball entrance is easily held, and therefore, many ball entering sounds for the ball entering the first ball entrance can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to continuously make a sound with the ball-entering sound, and the player can be entertained. Conversely, since the variable effect for the ball entering the other first ball entrance is suspended until all the variable effects for the ball entering the one first ball entrance are executed, the other first ball entering is continued. A situation arises in which the variable effect that is reserved for the mouth soon reaches the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reservations does not decrease from there. Therefore, even if a ball entry sound for another first ball entrance is produced, while the variation effect for the maximum number of pending balls continues to be held, there is a ball entering the other first ball entrance. Also, since the ball-entering sound is not pronounced, the player is given the impression that the melody of the ball-entering sound is interrupted. On the other hand, if a ball-entering sound is generated only when the ball enters one of the first ball-entering holes, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it is determined that a ball has been hit, and a ball hitting sound is produced. That is, no ball-entering sound is generated for the ball entering the first ball-entering hole 64 that has not been suspended. On the other hand, main controller 110 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. A notification command may be transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113, and upon receiving the command, the audio ramp control device 113 may temporarily stock the incoming ball and generate the incoming ball sound. As a result, although the sound of entering balls will be pronounced even for the sounds of entering balls that were not suspended, the sound of entering balls will be produced for a larger number of entering balls, resulting in a more complex rhythm. and melody can be played with the sound of entering the ball, which is pronounced in accordance with the BGM. Therefore, the player can be entertained more.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the description has been given of the case in which the ball entry sound and the operation sound are pronounced at pitches that match the BGM code in accordance with the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM. Regardless of the timing of the first beat or the backbeat, it matches the BGM code at that time without delay at the timing when it is detected that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the frame button 22 has been operated. A ball-entering sound or an operation sound may be produced at the pitch. As a result, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of the ball-entering sound and the operation sound, and played by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained with various melodies played by the ball-entering sound and the operation sound from time to time.

In each of the above embodiments, the frame rate (frame update cycle) in the third pattern display device 81 and the BGM tempo (beat cycle) are not considered. However, for example, in the above-described embodiment, while the frame update cycle in the third pattern display device 81 is 20 milliseconds, if the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, the beat cycle is 375 milliseconds. , the frame update timing in the third pattern display device 81 and the beat timing of the BGM are shifted by 15 milliseconds at the maximum. In general, there is no problem if the lag between the image and the sound is less than the frame update period. However, there may be cases where it is desired to display an image on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM. In this case, for example, the audio ramp control device 113 monitors the frame update timing of the third pattern display device 81, causes the third pattern display device 81 to display a predetermined effect image at the timing of a certain beat, and When a sound is to be produced, the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display a predetermined effect image at the update timing of the frame that comes immediately after the timing of the beat, and the sound output LSI 301 is caused to display the effect image. You may instruct|indicate pronunciation of a sound. As a result, it is possible to display a predetermined performance image on the third pattern display device 81 and to output a sound corresponding to the display almost at the timing of the beat of the original BGM, although it is slightly shifted from the timing of the beat of the original BGM. Note that the monitoring of the frame update timing in the third pattern display device 81 in the audio lamp control device 113 is, for example, immediately after the power is turned on, the audio lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the third pattern. After instructing to start driving the device 81, the display control device 114 updates the frame displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the instruction at intervals of 20 milliseconds, while the sound lamp control device 113 updates the This may be done by always counting 20 milliseconds from the instruction. Also, when the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V interrupt signal from the display control device 114, the voice ramp control device 113 may monitor the update timing of the frame in the third pattern display device 81.

Alternatively, the tempo of the BGM may be changed so that the beat cycle of the BGM is a multiple of the frame update cycle of the third pattern display device 81, and the sound output LSI 301 may be instructed to reproduce the BGM. For example, if the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM, the sound output LSI 301 is instructed to output that BPM so that the beat period is 380 milliseconds, for example, and the tempo of the BGM is 157.9 BPM. may As a result, the frame update timing in the third pattern display device 81 and the beat timing of the BGM can always be matched, so that the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 accurately in accordance with the beat timing of the BGM. can be displayed. Also, if the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the beat cycle of the BGM is the closest value to the beat cycle of the original BGM among the multiples of the frame update cycle of the third pattern display device 81, then the BGM , the tempo does not change significantly, so that the player can listen to the BGM without any sense of incongruity.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the initial values are stored in various flags, memories, etc. The case of setting (S1810 in FIG. 23) and initialization has been described. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again, the sound lamp control device 113 always starts operating from the initial state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 determines the state of the game of the pachinko machine 10 backed up in the main controller 110 (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) or , the number of held balls is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets values in various flags, memories, etc. provided in the RAM 223 according to the command received from the main control device 110. You may do so. As a result, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 performs sound output and lamp output reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110, and the display control device 114 On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display an image reflecting the state backed up by the main controller 110 . Therefore, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, since the sound output, the lamp output, and the image display on the third pattern display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure, the player can play the game with peace of mind. can be continued.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. , Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high-speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the specified elements required for the variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may make it "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be provided efficiently.

In each of the above embodiments, when the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) of the one-frame image at which drawing processing ends. , the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer to which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image rendered first from the other frame buffer. Although the case where information is read out and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the explanation has been given for the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9" attached, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the display data table defines the content of the image (drawing content) to be drawn in correspondence with the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 displays 1/30 second Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn which is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received in the voice ramp control device 113, the case where the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, in the variation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start process (S1207) Even if the reserved ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 good. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 .

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 . In addition, by connecting an audio lamp control device to the display control device, a command for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and a character object operation start command for instructing the start of the operation of the character object, can be output to the audio lamp. It may be configured to send to the controller. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command directly received from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, the display control device to the audio lamp control device: A command for instructing output of each sound, lighting/flashing of a lamp, and start of operation of a movable accessory may be transmitted. At this time, the display control device manages the timing of beats and back beats of the BGM, and the display control device outputs each sound to the audio lamp control device at the timing of the beats and back beats of the BGM. You may send a command to instruct the lighting/blinking of , or to start the operation of the movable accessory.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the audio ramp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the audio ramp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, A display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, output of sound, lighting/blinking of the lamp, The action of the first role product 87 may be controlled.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball entrance 64 and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 numerically, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third design.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, majang ball, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include: In the slot machine, for example, the variation of the pattern after the operation lever is operated is started at the beat of the BGM, and the sound is produced in accordance with the start of the variation, so that the rhythm of the BGM is realized. It is possible to provide the player with a game that matches the There is also an insertion sound when a coin is inserted, and a setting sound when the bet number is set by operating a bet button for setting the number of bets from the coins stored in advance instead of inserting coins. is pronounced at the beat of the BGM, it is possible to provide the player with a game that matches the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, at least a period during which the player is playing a game Output means for outputting music inside, judgment means for judging the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and production for executing the production in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judgment means. A gaming machine A1 comprising: an executing means;

According to the gaming machine A1, the judgment is made by the judging means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Here, the music is output by the output means at least while the player is playing the game. The judging means judges the beat timing of the music output by the outputting means. Then, an effect is executed by the effect execution means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined by the determination means. As a result, the performance is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game to the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with setting means for setting the sounding of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, and the effect executing means is set by the setting means. a game machine A2, wherein the game machine A2 is a sound generating means for generating the notification sound in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, with the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as a trigger, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. In other words, in order to notify the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the notification sound is sounded at the timing of the beat of the music that is output at least while the player is playing the game. As a result, the notification sound is produced in time with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game in accordance with the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The game machine A2 has at least main control means for controlling a game, the output means, the judgment means, and the sounding means, and controls sound output based on commands from the main control means. and control means, wherein the sound control means comprises acquisition means for acquiring a beat cycle of the music output by the output means, and the determination means determines when the output of the music is started by the output means. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the passage of time since then and the beat cycle of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on commands from the main control means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, the beat period of the music output by the output means is obtained by the obtaining means. Then, the determination means determines the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means based on the elapsed time since the output of the music was started by the output means and the beat cycle of the music acquired by the acquisition means. determined by Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined here. In this way, outputting music, acquiring the beat cycle of the output music, determining the timing of the beat of the output music, and producing the notification sound at the beat timing of the music based on the determination. are performed in the sound control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of the music can be accurately determined, and the notification sound can be announced in accordance with the accurately determined beat of the music.

In the gaming machine A2, main control means for controlling a game, display control means for controlling display on the display means based on commands from the main control means, the output means, the judgment means, and the sounding and a sound control means for controlling sound output based on a command from the main control means and a command from the display control means, wherein the display control means is the main control means output start determining means for determining the start of output of the music by the output means based on a command from the output start determining means; Transmission means for transmitting an instruction command for instructing start of output of music to said sound control means, and Acquisition for acquiring a beat cycle of said music whose output start is instructed by said instruction command transmitted by said transmission means. means, the number of beats of the music output by the output means based on the elapse of time since the instruction command was transmitted by the transmission means, and the beat cycle of the music acquired by the acquisition means. notification means for judging a timing and notifying the timing of the beat to the sound control means, wherein the judgment means, based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music from the notification means, outputs the output A gaming machine A4 characterized by judging the timing of beats of music output by means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the display on the display means is controlled by the display control means based on the command from the main control means. Further, the sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means and the command from the display control means. In the sound control means, the sound output is also controlled based on the command from the display control means, so that the sound can be easily output in accordance with the image displayed on the display means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, in the display control means, the start of output of the music by the output means is determined by the output start determination means based on the command from the main control means. When the output start determination means determines that the output means should start outputting the music, the transmission means of the display control means transmits an instruction command to start outputting the music to the sound control means. Further, the acquisition means of the display control means acquires the beat period of the music whose output start is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmission means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music to be output by the output means is determined based on the elapse of time since the instruction command was transmitted by the transmission means and the beat cycle of the music acquired by the acquisition means. , the timing of the beat is notified to the sound control means by the notifying means. The judging means of the sound control means judges the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music by the notifying means. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined here. In this way, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the display control means and notified to the sound control means, so that an image corresponding to the timing of the beat output by the output means is displayed on the display means. While being displayed, a notification sound can be produced according to the timing of the beat. Therefore, it is possible to output a notification sound in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM while showing the player an image that matches the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game through images and sounds while riding on the rhythm of the music output by the output means.

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4 has bet amount setting means for setting a predetermined game value as the bet amount, and the predetermined starting condition is a state in which the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. , on the condition that the starting operation means that can be operated by the player has been operated, and the setting means sets the bet amount when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by setting a notification sound for notifying the setting.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, in a state in which a predetermined game value is set as the number of bets by the bet amount setting means, the determination is made by the determining means under the condition that the player operates the starting operation means as a predetermined starting condition, and the identification information is determined. is executed by the dynamic display executing means. At this time, when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a notification sound for informing the setting of the bet amount is set by the setting means. As a result, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. Since the information can be recognized by the notification sound produced by the player, the player can play the game to the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; A game board and a game board provided on the game board in a game machine that gives a player a predetermined game value when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means. A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area, a detection means for detecting passage of the game ball when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, and the detection means payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when passage of game balls through the predetermined area is detected; and output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means; and, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected. setting means for setting the sounding of the notification sound for notification; and sounding means for sounding the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine B1, the determination is made by the determination means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. A game ball is shot by the shooting means toward a game area provided on the game board, and when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. When the detection means detects the passing of the game balls in the predetermined area, the payout means pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. The judging means judges the beat timing of the music output by the outputting means. On the other hand, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area by the detection means, the setting means sets the sound of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. That is, when the game ball shot toward the game area passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the notification sound for notifying the passage is generated at least during the period when the player is playing the game. Pronounced according to the beat timing of the output music. As a result, the notification sound that also means the payout of the game balls is produced in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can listen to the notification sound that also means the payout of the game balls while riding the rhythm of the music. , can enhance the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine B1, the determination means determines not only the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts, When the number of unsounded notification sounds of the notification sounds set by the setting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the sound generation means controls the divided positions determined by the determination means. A game machine B2 is characterized in that the timing is also used to generate the notification sound.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the determination means determines the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts. Then, when the number of notification sounds whose pronunciation is set by the setting means and the number of unsounded notification sounds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the equally divided position timing determined by the determination means is also used. , a notification sound is generated by the sound generating means. As a result, when a large number of game balls pass through the predetermined area of the game board, not only the timing of the beat of the music but also the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is divided into sub-numbers. is pronounced, it is possible to engrave a more complicated rhythm with the notification sound. Therefore, the more complicated the rhythm, the more game balls pass through the predetermined area, that is, the more game balls are paid out. Therefore, by engraving a complicated rhythm of the notification sound to the music output from the output means, the player can be entertained by the rhythm, and at the same time, the player can be informed that a large number of game balls will be paid out. There is an effect that notification can be easily made.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the establishment of the predetermined starting condition includes the case where the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area, it means that the predetermined start condition is established, so the determination is made by the determination means. Based on the determination result, the identification information is displayed on the display means. is executed by the dynamic display executing means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. As a result, not only the payout of game balls but also the notification sound, which means the dynamic display of the identification information leading to the provision of a predetermined game value, is produced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. by listening to the rhythm of the music, the expectation for the game can be heightened. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the detection means is provided in the game area, and detects the game ball passing through the area only during a period during which a predetermined game value is given to the player. A game machine B4 characterized in that it detects the passage of the game ball when it passes.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through an area provided in the game area and configured to allow the game ball to pass only during a period during which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. detected by Then, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through this area by the detection means, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. In this way, during a period in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player, when a game ball passes through an area configured to allow the game ball to pass only during that period, a notification sound is produced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. be done. Since this notification sound notifies the passage of the game ball to the special area during the period in which the predetermined game value is awarded, the player listens to the notification sound with pleasure while matching the rhythm of the music. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be heightened.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, at least a period during which the player is playing a game and output means for outputting music in the game, and sounding means for producing a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game, the sounding means producing the sound. and a pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be produced based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

According to the game machine C1, determination is made by the determining means when a predetermined starting condition is established, and based on the result of the determination, identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display executing means. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. On the other hand, with the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as a trigger, a notification sound for announcing the occurrence of the event is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced is specified by the chord specification means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determination means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is produced not only in time with the rhythm of the music, but also with a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C1, the pitch determination means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be produced from among constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. .

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pitch of the informative sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determining means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, so that the informative sound forms musical chords and chords. pronounced at a pitch Therefore, a pleasant melody composed of music and chords can be played by the notification sound, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the pitch determining means determines the notification sound to be produced at the timing when the chord specified by the chord specifying means is changed to a new chord at the timing. A game machine C3 characterized in that the root note of the chord is determined as the pitch.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a chord is identified by the chord identifying means, if the identified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is the pitch of that chord. A root note is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound with a pitch other than the root note of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the chord of the music is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, It may make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by generating a notification sound having the pitch of the root sound, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed chord. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can listen to comfortable sounds.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the chord identifying means determines the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound was produced before the timing at which the notification sound was produced, together with the chord of the music at the timing at which the information is produced. and the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is to be produced after the timing of producing the sound, and the pitch determining means determines that the chords specified by the chord specifying means are all the same chord. If the pitch of the informative sound that is pronounced before this timing is the constituent sound of the chord, the passage of the chord is determined as the pitch of the informative sound that is to be pronounced at this timing. A gaming machine C4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in combination with the music code at the current sounding timing, the musical code at the timing at which the notification sound was sounded before the sounding timing, and the sounding of the notification sound after the sounding timing. A chord of the music at the timing is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, if all of the specified chords are the same chord and the pitch of the informative sound that was pronounced before the timing of this sounding is the component sound of the chord, the informational sound that is sounded at this timing is determined. As the pitch, the passage of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, information sounds accompanied by music are generated while inserting information sounds having pitches corresponding to the passage sounds of the chords in addition to the information sounds having pitches corresponding to the constituent sounds of the chords of the music. Variation can be given to the melody by sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody of the notification sound does not become monotonous, and the voice output can be performed so as not to make the player bored.

In the gaming machine C4, the pitch determination means determines the pitch of the notification sound at a timing at which the notification sound is produced after the timing at which the notification sound having the pitch of the passing sound is produced. A gaming machine C5 characterized by determining

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is sounded after the timing of the sound of the notification sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound is composed of a code. A sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound having the pitch of the chord transition sound is generated sandwiched between the notification sounds having the pitch of the constituent sounds of the chord, so that the notification sound having the pitch of the chord transition sound is generated. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be made to be heard by the player without discomfort, assuming that it matches the chords of the music.

In the game machine C4 or C5, the pitch determining means determines that the codes specified by the chord specifying means are all the same code, and the pitch of the notification sound pronounced before the sounding timing is the same. If it is a chord component sound, the pitch of the passing sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the component sound, and the key of the music. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is calculated by

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the musical code at the timing to be sounded, the musical code at the timing at which the notification sound was sounded before the sounding timing, and the sounding timing If the chords of the music at the timing at which the informative sound is pronounced later are all the same chords, and the pitch of the informative sound that is pronounced before this timing is the sound that constitutes the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sounds, and the keynote of the music, the pitch determination means calculates the pitch of the passing sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing. Therefore, in order to determine the transitions, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the transitions by associating the chords of the music, the pitches of the previously pronounced constituent notes, and the key of the music. , the memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, a game board, a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area provided on the game board, and a predetermined area provided in the game area where the game balls shoot. detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball when it passes through; and payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. wherein, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area, the sound generating means generates a notification sound for notifying that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball is shot by the shooting means toward a game area provided on the game board and passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. be. When the detection means detects the passing of the game balls in the predetermined area, the payout means pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player. Further, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area by the detection means, a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area is produced by the sound generating means. At this time, the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced is specified by the chord specification means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determination means based on the specified code. Thus, every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area where a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out by the payout means, the notification sound is produced with a pitch matching the chord progression of the music. Therefore, the melody that matches the chord progression of the music played by the notification sound has the effect that the player can further enhance the pleasure of paying out the game balls.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C7, determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and a device for notifying the occurrence of an event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game. setting means for setting pronunciation of the notification sound, wherein the sounding means produces the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the beat timing of the music determined by the determination means. C8 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means determines the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Further, when an event occurs as the game progresses, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. In other words, the notification sound is produced at least in time with the beat of the music that is output while the player is playing the game. As a result, a melody matching the rhythm and chords of the music is played by the notification sound, so that there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game more.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, at least a period during which the player is playing a game and output means for outputting music inside, and display control for controlling the display of a new image, the stoppage of the image, or the deletion of the image on the display means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine D1, determination is made by the determining means when a predetermined starting condition is met, and based on the result of the determination, identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display executing means. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Here, music is output by the output means at least while the player is playing a game. Display of a new image on the display means, stoppage of the image, or deletion of the image is controlled by the display control means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. That is, a new image is displayed on the display means, the image is stopped, or the image is erased in time with the rhythm of the music output by the output means. As a result, the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized in time with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. be.

In the game machine D1, the display control means simulates the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means one or more times in synchronization with the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D2 characterized by performing control to stop display automatically.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display control means controls to simulate the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means one or more times in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. done. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information, integrated with the rhythm of the music, repeats a pseudo stop display, for example, so that the player can see an effect that increases the expectation of a big win, You can enhance your interest in the game by matching it with the rhythm of the music. In this way, the dynamic display of the identification information can be given to the player as if it were displayed in time with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game rhythmically, thereby enhancing the player's interest. has the effect of being able to

setting means for setting a sound to be produced in accordance with the display of a new image, the stoppage of an image, or the deletion of an image performed by the display means under the control of the display control means in the gaming machine D1 or D2; and sounding means for producing the sound set by the setting means in synchronization with the beat of the music output from the output means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, under the control of the display control means, the setting means sets the sound to be produced in accordance with the display of a new image, the stoppage of the image, or the deletion of the image performed on the display means. Then, the set sound is produced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music outputted from the output means. Accordingly, not only is a new image displayed on the display means, the image stopped, or the image erased in time with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the corresponding sound is output. Pronounced according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the means. Therefore, not only can the image displayed on the display means be visually recognized in time with the rhythm of the music, but also the sound can be heard along with it. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, at least a period during which the player is playing a game The dynamic display execution means makes the identification information invisible in the dynamic display of the identification information in synchronization with the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E1 characterized by comprising a starting means for starting a state.

According to the gaming machine E1, determination is made by the determining means when a predetermined starting condition is established, and based on the result of the determination, identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display executing means. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Here, music is output by the output means at least while the player is playing a game. In synchronization with the beat of the output music, the starting means starts the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player as if it were started at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the music. can let someone Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the beat timing of the music, the start means displays the identification information from the start timing to the beat timing of the music. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state, and the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information is started in synchronization with the beat of the music.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visually recognizable state from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. In accordance with the timing of the beat, the starting means performs the dynamic display of the identification information so as to start the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, even if the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the player will feel as if the dynamic display of the identification information was started in time with the beat of the music. can be shown to Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can make the player feel as if the dynamic display is performed in time with the rhythm of the music.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the dynamic display execution means includes stop display execution means for executing stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information in synchronization with the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stop display execution means executes the stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player as if it were stopped at the timing of the beat of the music. You can let the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the stop display executing means dynamically displays the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music. is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner, and then the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visually recognizable state, and then the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. .

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo-stop-displayed at the beat of the music, and then the identification information is visually recognized. After dynamically displaying the identification information in a possible state, the static display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so as to statically display the dynamic display of the identification information at the static display timing. As a result, even if the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the dynamic display of the identification information is stop-displayed to the player in time with the beat of the music. You can make it look like Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can make the player feel as if the dynamic display is performed in time with the rhythm of the music.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started by the start means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, is , a game machine E5 characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the initiation means initiates high-speed dynamic display of the identification information in time with the beat of the music. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player as if it were started at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the music. can let someone Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, an operation means that can be operated by the player; An operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, an output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game, and a timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined. setting means for setting the sound of a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed, based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means; and the setting means A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a sounding means for producing the set notification sound in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine F1, the determination is made by the determining means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Further, an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, the output means outputs music at least while the player is playing a game. The judging means judges the beat timing of the music output by the outputting means. Here, based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. That is, when the player operates the operating means, the notification sound is produced in time with the beat of the music. As a result, the player can enjoy the game more by listening to the notification sound while riding the rhythm of the music. In addition, since the user can listen to the notification sound that follows the rhythm of the music, the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed, and the operation means can be actively operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F1, the determination means determines not only the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts, When the number of unsounded notification sounds of the notification sounds set by the setting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the sound generation means controls the divided positions determined by the determination means. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the timing is also used to generate the notification sound.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the determination means determines the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts. Then, when the number of notification sounds whose pronunciation is set by the setting means and the number of unsounded notification sounds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the equally divided position timing determined by the determination means is also used. , a notification sound is generated by the sound generating means. As a result, when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times at short intervals, not only the timing of the beat of the music, but also the timing of the equally divided positions when the beat is equally divided into sub-numbers. However, since an informational sound is produced, it is possible to engrave a more complicated rhythm with the informational sound. Therefore, by setting a complicated rhythm for the notification sound to the music output from the output means, the player can be entertained by the rhythm. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated by the player.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sounding means includes code specifying means for specifying the code of the music at the timing of sounding, and the sound of the notification sound to be sounded based on the code specified by the code specifying means. and pitch determining means for determining a pitch.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced is specified by the chord specification means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determination means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is produced not only in time with the rhythm of the music, but also with a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operating means in order to listen to the melody.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, an operation means that can be operated by the player; operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated; output means for outputting music at least while the player is playing a game; and operation of the operation means detected by the operation detection means. a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed based on the fact, wherein the sounding means is a chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the sounding timing; a pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be produced based on the code specified by the code specifying means.

According to the gaming machine F4, the judgment is made by the judging means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Further, an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, the output means outputs music at least while the player is playing a game. Then, based on the detection of the operation of the operating means by the operation detecting means, the sounding means emits a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed. At this time, the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced is specified by the chord specification means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determination means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is produced not only in time with the rhythm of the music, but also with a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operating means in order to listen to the melody.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the pitch determination means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be produced from among constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the pitch of the informative sound to be pronounced is determined by the pitch determining means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the informative sound is simply pronounced in time with the rhythm of the music. Not only is it played, but it is pronounced at the pitches from which musical chords and chords are formed. Therefore, a pleasant melody composed of music and chords can be played by the notification sound, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the pitch determining means causes the chord specified by the chord specifying means to be pronounced at that timing if the chord specified by the chord specifying means is changed to a new chord at that timing. A game machine F6 characterized in that the root sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a chord is identified by the chord identifying means, if the identified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is the pitch of that chord. A root note is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound with a pitch other than the root note of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the chord of the music is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, It may make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will stop operating the operating means. On the other hand, by generating a notification sound having the pitch of the root sound, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed chord. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can listen to comfortable sounds.

In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the chord specifying means determines the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced before the timing at which the notification sound is produced, together with the chord of the music at the timing at which the information is produced. and the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is to be produced after the timing of producing the sound, and the pitch determining means determines that the chords specified by the chord specifying means are all the same chord. If the pitch of the informative sound that is pronounced before this timing is the constituent sound of the chord, the passage of the chord is determined as the pitch of the informative sound that is to be pronounced at this timing. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in combination with the music code at the current sounding timing, the musical code at the timing at which the notification sound was sounded before the sounding timing, and the sounding of the notification sound after the sounding timing. A chord of the music at the timing is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, if all of the specified chords are the same chord and the pitch of the informative sound that was pronounced before the timing of this sounding is the component sound of the chord, the informational sound that is sounded at this timing is determined. As the pitch, the passage of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, in accordance with the rhythm of the music, the notification sounds are generated while inserting the notification sounds having the pitches of the chord constituent sounds of the music, and inserting the notification sounds having the pitches of the chord transition sounds of the music. Thus, variations can be given to the melody of the notification sound accompanied by music. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody of the notification sound does not become monotonous, and the voice output can be performed so as not to make the player bored.

In the game machine F7, the pitch determination means determines the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is produced after the timing of the production of the notification sound having the pitch of the passing sound. A gaming machine F8 characterized by determining

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is produced after the timing of the production of the notification sound having the pitch of the passing sound is composed of a code. A sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound having the pitch of the chord transition sound is generated sandwiched between the notification sounds having the pitch of the constituent sounds of the chord, so that the notification sound having the pitch of the chord transition sound is generated. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be made to be heard by the player without discomfort, assuming that it matches the chords of the music.

In the gaming machine F7 or F8, the pitch determining means determines that the codes specified by the chord specifying means are all the same code, and that the pitch of the notification sound pronounced before the sounding timing is the same. If it is a chord component sound, the pitch of the passing sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the component sound, and the key of the music. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that it is calculated by

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the musical code at the timing to be sounded, the musical code at the timing at which the notification sound was sounded before the sounding timing, and the sounding timing If the chords of the music at the timing at which the informative sound is pronounced later are all the same chords, and the pitch of the informative sound that is pronounced before this timing is the sound that constitutes the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sounds, and the keynote of the music, the pitch determination means calculates the pitch of the passing sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing. Therefore, in order to determine the transitions, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the transitions by associating the chords of the music, the pitches of the previously pronounced constituent notes, and the key of the music. , the memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; A movable accessory that operates according to the progress of a game in a gaming machine that provides a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means. , driving means for driving the movable accessory, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game, and timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and drive control means for controlling the drive means so that the movable accessory operates.

According to the gaming machine G1, the determination is made by the determining means when the predetermined starting condition is met, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the result of the determination. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Also, a movable accessory is provided that operates according to the progress of the game, and the movable accessory is driven by the drive means. Here, music is output by the output means at least while the player is playing a game. The driving means is controlled by the driving control means so that the movable accessory moves in time with the beat of the music output by the output means. As a result, the movable accessory moves in time with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a game machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, light that lights up or blinks according to the progress of the game means, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a game is played by a player, and said light emitting means for lighting or blinking in time with the beat of the music output by said output means. and light emission control means for controlling the gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, the judgment is made by the judging means when the predetermined starting condition is established, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Also provided is light-emitting means that lights or blinks according to the progress of the game. Here, music is output by the output means at least while the player is playing a game. The light emission control means controls the light emission means to light up or flash in time with the beat of the music output by the output means. As a result, the light-emitting means lights up or flashes in time with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game to the rhythm of the music, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution, comprising: determining means for performing determination when a predetermined starting condition is established; In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, at least a period during which the player is playing a game output means for outputting music in the game; and sounding means for generating a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, wherein the sounding means outputs the above-mentioned output. key specifying means for specifying the key of the music output by means; chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of sounding; the chord specified by the chord specifying means; and specifying by the key specifying means. pitch determination means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be produced based on the keynote played by the game machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, the judgment is made by the judging means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result. be. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby making the player interested. Also, music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. On the other hand, with the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as a trigger, a notification sound for announcing the occurrence of the event is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the key note of the music output by the output means is specified by the key note specifying means, and the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, the pitch of the notification sound to be produced is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord and key of the music. As a result, the notification sound is pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression in accordance with the scale determined by the keynote of the music, so that a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1, the pitch determining means determines the pitch based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the key note specified by the key note specifying means, based on the relationship between the tonic of the key note and the chord. The gaming machine H2 is characterized by calculating the pitch of the notification sound according to the scale determined by the keynote.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the key note specified by the key note specifying means, the pitch of the notification sound is changed according to the scale determined by the key note from the relationship between the key note of the key note and the chord. Calculated by high determination means. The reason why the pitch can be determined by calculation in this way is that the scale, which is determined according to the keynote set for the music, only changes the pitch of the keynote of the keynote. ) is always constant. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a table for determining the pitch, and a memory area for storing the table is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any one of game machines A1-A5, B1-B4, C1-C8, D1-D3, E1-E5, F1-F9, G1, G2, H1 and H2, the game machine is a slot machine. game machine I1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1-A5, B1-B4, C1-C8, D1-D3, E1-E5, F1-F9, G1, G2, H1, H2, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine I2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1-A5, B1-B4, C1-C8, D1-D3, E1-E5, F1-F9, G1, G2, H1 and H2, the game machine comprises a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, display means such as liquid crystal display devices display various effects images such as variable effects (dynamic display of identification information) to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent document 1: JP-A-2001-046635). The variable effect is a effect that starts when a ball enters (starts winning) into the ball entrance (starting hole). A total of nine patterns or the like are displayed, and the displayed patterns or the like are scrolled based on predetermined game conditions, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stopped patterns form a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. If there is, it will generate a jackpot. Background music (BGM) is output from the game machine while such an effect is being performed, further enhancing the interest of the game.
However, in the conventional game machine, the background music is simply played from the speaker, and the background music is hardly interesting for the player, and it is not very useful for improving the interest of the game. There was a situation that there was no.
The present technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by using music output at least during the period in which the game is being played. It is intended to

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
60 game board 64 first entrance (detection means)
65a special winning opening (detection means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
87 first accessory (movable accessory)
87a Motor for vertical movement of first accessory (driving means)
87e Motor for rotating the first accessory (driving means)
110 main controller (main control means)
111 payout control device (payout means)
112a ball launch unit (launching means)
113 Sound lamp control device (sound control means, drive control means, light emission control means)
114 display control device (dynamic display execution means, display control means)
227 lamp display device (light emitting means)
S1207 Fluctuation start processing (determining means)
S1907 (setting means, operation detecting means)
S2010 (setting means)
S2121 (judgment means)
S2129 (setting means)
S2131 (pronunciation means)
S2135 Start winning sound output processing (sound generation means)
S2137 Frame button operation sound output processing (sound generation means)
S2144 (output means)
S2145 (acquisition means)
S2161, S2171, S2177 (code specifying means)
S2159, S2161, S2164 (pitch determining means)
S2174, S2177 (pitch determining means)
S3611 (output start determination means)
S3612 (transmitting means)
S3613 (acquisition means)
S3616 (notification means)
S3807 (output means)
S4001 (judgment means)
S4203 (acquisition means)
S4206 (notification means)
S4401, S4402 (pitch determining means)

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises: determining means for performing a determination when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display execution means, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. An output means for outputting background music at least during a period in which a game is played by a player ; and a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of a game, wherein the sounding means is output at the timing of sounding the notification sound during a period in which the gaming machine is in a predetermined gaming state. A notification sound including pitches corresponding to constituent sounds forming chords of the background music to be played is selected based on the progressing background music .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is established, and the dynamic display execution for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. means for imparting a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least Output means for outputting background music during a period in which a game is played by a player ; and sounding means for producing a notification sound , wherein the sounding means generates a code of the background music output at the timing of producing the notification sound during a period in which the gaming machine is in a predetermined gaming state. Since the notification sound including the pitches corresponding to the constituent sounds is selected based on the background music that progresses, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Claims (1)

Judgment means for making a judgment when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; instruction means for instructing start of dynamic display of identification information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the judgment result by the judgment means, wherein the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means includes predetermined identification information. In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when appears,
output means for outputting predetermined music under a condition different from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information instructed by the instruction means at least during a period in which the player is playing a game;
Simulating the dynamic display of the identification information one or more times in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output by the output means before the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means a display control means for performing control to stop and display the
and sounding means for producing a sound indicating that the pseudo stop display has occurred in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the rhythm of the predetermined music output from the output means. game machine.

Images